Page 1 ® R&S Signal and Spectrum Analyzer User Manual (;×ì;2) 1173941102...
Page 2 ® This manual applies to the following R&S FSW models with firmware version 4.50 and later: ● ® R&S FSW8 (1331.5003K08 / 1312.8000K08) ● R&S ® FSW13 (1331.5003K13 / 1312.8000K13) ● ® R&S FSW26 (1331.5003K26 / 1312.8000K26) ● ® R&S FSW43 (1331.5003K43 / 1312.8000K43) ●...
Page 3: Table Of Contents
® Contents R&S Contents 1 Preface....................17 About this Manual....................... 17 Conventions Used in the Documentation..............18 1.2.1 Typographical Conventions...................18 1.2.2 Conventions for Procedure Descriptions...............18 1.2.3 Notes on Screenshots....................18 2 Safety Information................20 3 Documentation Overview..............21 Getting Started Manual....................21 User Manuals and Help....................21 Service Manual......................
Page 4 ® Contents R&S 5.3.1 Measuring a Basic Signal....................63 5.3.2 Displaying a Spectrogram..................... 65 5.3.3 Activating Additional Measurement Channels...............67 5.3.4 Performing Sequential Measurements................70 5.3.5 Setting and Moving a Marker..................71 5.3.6 Displaying a Marker Peak List..................72 5.3.7 Zooming into the Display....................73 5.3.8 Zooming into the Display Permanently.................
Page 5 ® Contents R&S 7.1.5 Measurement Examples - Measuring Signal Spectra with Multiple Signals....140 7.1.6 Measurement Examples in Zero Span................146 Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement....152 7.2.1 About Channel Power Measurements................ 152 7.2.2 Channel Power Results....................153 7.2.3 Channel Power Basics....................155 7.2.4 Channel Power Configuration..................
Page 6 ® Contents R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement............. 235 7.6.1 About the Measurement....................236 7.6.2 Typical Applications.....................236 7.6.3 SEM Results....................... 236 7.6.4 SEM Basics.........................239 7.6.5 SEM Configuration...................... 250 7.6.6 How to Perform a Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement........267 7.6.7 Measurement Example: Multi-SEM Measurement............272 7.6.8 Reference: SEM File Descriptions................
Page 7 ® Contents R&S 7.10.1 About the Measurement....................312 7.10.2 Harmonic Distortion Basics..................313 7.10.3 Harmonic Distortion Results..................315 7.10.4 Harmonic Distortion Configuration................316 7.10.5 How to Determine the Harmonic Distortion..............318 7.11 Third Order Intercept (TOI) Measurement...............318 7.11.1 About the TOI Measurement..................319 7.11.2 TOI Basics........................319 7.11.3...
Page 8 ® Contents R&S 8.2.4 Optional External Generator Control................381 8.2.5 Optional External Mixers..................... 409 8.2.6 Output Settings......................436 8.2.7 Trigger Input/Output Settings..................438 8.2.8 How to Output a Trigger Signal................... 440 Frequency and Span Configuration................ 441 8.3.1 Impact of the Frequency and Span Settings............... 441 8.3.2 Frequency and Span Settings..................443 8.3.3...
Page 9 ® Contents R&S 9.3.1 Basics on Markers.......................515 9.3.2 Marker Settings......................518 9.3.3 Marker Search Settings and Positioning Functions............ 524 9.3.4 Marker (Measurement) Functions................531 9.3.5 How to Work With Markers..................552 9.3.6 Measurement Example: Measuring Harmonics Using Marker Functions....555 Display and Limit Lines.................... 556 9.4.1 Display Lines.......................557 9.4.2...
Page 10 ® Contents R&S 11.5.2 How to Store or Print Screenshots of the Display............650 11.5.3 Example for Storing Multiple Measurement Results to a PDF File......653 12 General Instrument Setup..............656 12.1 Alignment........................656 12.1.1 Basics on Alignment....................656 12.1.2 Alignment Settings...................... 658 12.1.3 How to Perform a Self-Test..................
Page 11 ® Contents R&S 12.7.4 Service Functions......................716 12.7.5 Hardware Diagnostics....................718 12.8 Synchronizing Measurement Channel Configuration........... 719 12.8.1 General Parameter Coupling..................719 12.8.2 User-Defined Parameter Coupling................722 12.8.3 How to Synchronize Parameters.................726 12.8.4 Example for a User-Defined Parameter Coupling............727 13 Network and Remote Operation............730 13.1 Remote Control Basics.....................730 13.1.1...
Page 12 ® Contents R&S 13.6.1 How to Configure a Network..................797 13.6.2 How to Operate the Instrument Without a Network.............804 13.6.3 How to Log on to the Network..................804 13.6.4 How to Share Directories (only with Microsoft Networks)........... 806 13.6.5 How to Control the R&S FSW via the Web Browser Interface........807 13.6.6 How to Deactivate the Web Browser Interface............808 13.6.7...
Page 13 ® Contents R&S 14.5.16 Measuring the Pulse Power..................1008 14.6 Configuring the Result Display................1013 14.6.1 General Window Commands..................1013 14.6.2 Working with Windows in the Display................1014 14.6.3 Examples: Configuring the Result Display..............1021 14.7 Setting Basic Measurement Parameters...............1023 14.7.1 Defining the Frequency and Span................1024 14.7.2 Configuring Bandwidth and Sweep Settings.............
Page 14 ® Contents R&S 14.10.9 Signal Generator Control Commands............... 1307 14.10.10 Using Service Functions................... 1308 14.10.11 Remote Commands for Synchronizing Parameters..........1311 14.11 Using the Status Register..................1325 14.11.1 General Status Register Commands................ 1326 14.11.2 Reading Out the CONDition Part................1326 14.11.3 Reading Out the EVENt Part..................1327 14.11.4...
Page 15: User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 43
® Contents R&S 16.7 Contacting Customer Support................1397 List of Commands (base unit)............1399 Index....................1423 User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 43...
Page 16 ® Contents R&S User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 43...
Page 17: Preface
® Preface R&S About this Manual 1 Preface This chapter provides safety-related information, an overview of the user documenta- tion and the conventions used in the documentation. 1.1 About this Manual This User Manual describes general instrument functions and settings common to all applications and operating modes in the R&S FSW.
Page 18: Conventions Used In The Documentation
® Preface R&S Conventions Used in the Documentation ● Troubleshooting Hints and tips on how to handle errors ● List of Commands Alphabetical list of all remote commands described in the manual ● Index 1.2 Conventions Used in the Documentation 1.2.1 Typographical Conventions The following text markers are used throughout this documentation: Convention...
Page 19 ® Preface R&S Conventions Used in the Documentation possible interdependencies between parameters. The shown values may not represent realistic usage scenarios. The screenshots usually show a fully equipped product, that is: with all options instal- led. Thus, some functions shown in the screenshots may not be available in your par- ticular product configuration.
Page 20: Safety Information
® Safety Information R&S 2 Safety Information The product documentation helps you use the R&S FSW safely and efficiently. Follow the instructions provided here and in the printed "Basic Safety Instructions". Keep the product documentation nearby and offer it to other users. Intended use The R&S FSW is intended for the development, production and verification of elec- tronic components and devices in industrial, administrative, and laboratory environ-...
Page 21: Documentation Overview
® Documentation Overview R&S Service Manual 3 Documentation Overview This section provides an overview of the R&S FSW user documentation. Unless speci- fied otherwise, you find the documents on the R&S FSW product page at: www.rohde-schwarz.com/manual/FSW 3.1 Getting Started Manual Introduces the R&S FSW and describes how to set up and start working with the prod- uct.
Page 22: Instrument Security Procedures
® Documentation Overview R&S Application Notes, Application Cards, White Papers, etc. https://gloris.rohde-schwarz.com 3.4 Instrument Security Procedures Deals with security issues when working with the R&S FSW in secure areas. It is avail- able for download on the Internet. 3.5 Basic Safety Instructions Contains safety instructions, operating conditions and further important information.
Page 23: Welcome To The R&S Fsw
® Welcome to the R&S FSW R&S 4 Welcome to the R&S FSW The R&S FSW is a new high-performance Rohde & Schwarz signal and spectrum ana- lyzer developed to meet demanding customer requirements. Offering low phase noise, wide analysis bandwidth and straightforward and intuitive operation, the analyzer makes measurements fast and easy.
Page 24: Getting Started
® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use 5 Getting Started Note: the following chapters are identical to those in the printed R&S FSW Getting Started manual. ● Preparing for Use....................24 ● Instrument Tour....................... 45 ● Trying Out the Instrument..................63 ●...
Page 25 ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use Instrument damage caused by electrostatic discharge Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage the electronic components of the instrument and the device under test (DUT). Electrostatic discharge is most likely to occur when you connect or disconnect a DUT or test fixture to the instrument's test ports. To pre- vent electrostatic discharge, use a wrist strap and cord and connect yourself to the ground, or use a conductive floor mat and heel strap combination.
Page 26 ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use diately contact the carrier who delivered the instrument. Make sure not to discard the box and packing material. Packing material Retain the original packing material. If the instrument needs to be transported or ship- ped later, you can use the material to protect the control elements and connectors.
Page 27 ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use Risk of injury if feet are folded out The feet can fold in if they are not folded out completely or if the instrument is shifted. Collapsing feet can cause injury or damage the instrument. ●...
Page 28 ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use Rackmounting The R&S FSW can be installed in a rack using a rack adapter kit (order no. see data sheet). The installation instructions are part of the adapter kit. Risk of instrument damage due to insufficient airflow in a rack If you mount several instruments in a rack, you need an efficient ventilation concept to ensure that the instruments do not overheat.
Page 29 ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use 2. Set the AC power switch on the rear panel to position "O", or disconnect the instru- ment from the AC power supply. The R&S FSW changes into off mode. Risk of losing data If you switch off the running instrument using the rear panel switch or by disconnecting the power cord, the instrument loses its current settings.
Page 30: Windows Operating System
® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use Performing a self-test You do not have to repeat the self-test every time the instrument is switched on. It is only necessary when instrument malfunction is suspected. 1. Press the [SETUP] key. 2. Press the "Service" softkey. 3.
Page 31 ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use The following program packages have been tested: ● R&S Power Viewer Plus - virtual power meter for displaying results of the power sensor R&S NRPxx (install only this component!) ● Symantec Endpoint Security – virus-protection software ●...
Page 32 ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use Secure user mode If the secure user mode option (R&S FSW-K33) is installed, an additional account is provided: the "SecureUser". The "SecureUser" is a standard user account with limited functionality. In particular, administrative tasks such as LAN configuration or general instrument settings are not available.
Page 33 ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use Switching users when using the automatic login function Which user account is used is defined during login. If automatic login is active, the login window is not displayed. However, you can also switch the user account to be used when the automatic login function is active.
Page 34: Connecting Usb Devices
® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use This command reactivates automatic login function. It is active the next time the instrument reboots. 5.1.2.4 Accessing the Start Menu The Windows "Start" menu provides access to the Windows 10 functionality and instal- led programs.
Page 35 ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use If Windows does not find a suitable driver, it prompts you to specify a directory that contains the driver software. If the driver software is on a CD, connect a USB CD-ROM drive to the instrument before proceeding. When a USB device is then disconnected from the R&S FSW, Windows immediately detects the change in hardware configuration and deactivates the corresponding driver.
Page 36: Connecting An External Monitor
® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use To install a printer 1. To access the Windows operating system, press the Windows key on the external keyboard. 2. Select "Start > Settings > Devices > Add a printer or scanner". You can load updated and improved driver versions or new drivers from an installation disk, USB memory stick or another external storage medium.
Page 37: Setting Up A Network (Lan) Connection
® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use 5. If necessary, change the screen resolution to be used. Consider the information in the note above. 6. Select the instrument to be used for display: ● "Display 1": internal monitor only ● "Display 2": external monitor only ●...
Page 38 ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use ● Chapter 5.1.5.1, "Connecting the Instrument to the Network", on page 38 ● Chapter 5.1.5.2, "Assigning the IP Address", on page 39 Note that only user accounts with administrator rights can configure LAN networks. The R&S FSW supports the LXI core features.
Page 39 ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use If the instrument is connected to the LAN, Windows automatically detects the network connection and activates the required drivers. The network card can be operated with a 1 GBit Ethernet IEEE 802.3u interface. 5.1.5.2 Assigning the IP Address Depending on the network capacities, the TCP/IP address information for the instru-...
Page 40 ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use (See "Using a DNS server to determine the IP address" on page 40 and Chap- ter 5.1.5.3, "Using Computer Names", on page 41). 5. Enter the "IP Address", for example 192.0.2.0. The IP address consists of four number blocks separated by dots.
Page 41 ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use 5. Tap the entry named "Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)" to highlight it. 6. Select the "Properties" button. 7. On the "General" tab, select "Use the following DNS server addresses" and enter your own DNS addresses. For more information, refer to the Windows operating system help.
Page 42: Configuring The Initial Instrument Settings
® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use <Type><variant>-<serial_number> The serial number can be found on the rear panel of the instrument. It is the third part of the device ID printed on the bar code sticker: For example, FSW13-123456 To change the computer name 1.
Page 43: Protecting Data Using The Secure User Mode
® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use 2. Press the "Display" softkey. 3. Select the "General" tab in the "Display" dialog box. 4. Press the "Set Date and Time" button to open the standard Windows "Date and Time Properties" dialog box. 5.
Page 44 ® Getting Started R&S Preparing for Use Storing required data permanently Any data that is to be available for subsequent sessions with the R&S FSW must be stored on the instrument permanently, before activating the secure user mode. This includes predefined instrument settings, transducer factors and self-alignment data. Self-alignment data Note that self-alignment data becomes invalid with time and due to temperature changes.
Page 45: Instrument Tour
® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour The secure user mode setting and automatic login is automatically deactivated when the "Instrument" user logs on. The "SecureUser" is no longer available. For administrators ("Instrument" user), the secure user mode setting is available in the general system configuration settings (see "SecureUser Mode"...
Page 46 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour 4 = Headphones connector and volume control 5 = USB connectors 6 = POWER SENSOR connector 7 = PROBE connector 8 = NOISE SOURCE CONTROL 9 = Function keys 10 = Keypad 11 = Navigation controls 12 = (Analog) Baseband Input 50Ω...
Page 47 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour Figure 5-2: Touchscreen elements 1 = Toolbar with standard application functions, e.g. print, save/open file etc. 2 = Tabs for individual measurement channels 3 = Channel bar for firmware and measurement settings 4 = Input field for measurement setting 5 = Softkeys for function access 6 = Window title bar with diagram-specific (trace) information 7 = Measurement results area...
Page 48 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour 5.2.1.2 POWER Key The "POWER" key is located on the lower left corner of the front panel. It starts up and shuts down the instrument. See also Chapter 5.1.1.5, "Switching the Instrument On and Off", on page 28.
Page 49 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour Risk of hearing damage Before putting on the headphones, make sure that the volume setting is not too high to protect your hearing. 5.2.1.5 The front panel provides three female USB connectors (USB-A) to connect devices like a keyboard or a mouse.
Page 50 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour Table 5-2: Function keys Function key Assigned functions Basic measurement settings FREQ Sets the center frequency and the start and stop frequencies for the fre- quency range under consideration. This key is also used to set the fre- quency offset and the signal track function.
Page 51 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour Function key Assigned functions MEAS Provides the measurement functions. Measurement of multicarrier adjacent channel power (Ch Power ACLR) Carrier to noise spacing (C/N C/N Occupied bandwidth (OBW) Spectrum emission mask measurement (Spectrum Emission Mask) Spurious emissions (Spurious Emissions) Measurement of time domain power (Time Domain Power) Signal statistics: amplitude probability distribution (APD) and cumulative...
Page 52 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour Type of key Description ESC key Closes all kinds of dialog boxes, if the edit mode is not active. Quits the edit mode, if the edit mode is active. In dialog boxes that contain a "Can- cel"...
Page 53 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour Arrow Up/Arrow Down Keys The <arrow up> or <arrow down> keys do the following: ● For numeric entries: increments (Arrow Up) or decrements (Arrow Down) the instrument parameter at a defined step width ● In a list: scrolls forward and backward through the list entries ●...
Page 54 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour The upper BNC connectors BASEBAND INPUT I and BASEBAND INPUT Q are used to input: ● Single-ended signals ● The positive signal input for differential signals ● Input from active Rohde & Schwarz probes (see data sheet) The lower BNC connectors Ī...
Page 55 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour tions to the first are re-established. This can cause a short delay in data transfer after switching the input source. Input via the Analog Baseband Interface can be enabled in the I/Q Analyzer, the Ana- log Demodulation application, or in one of the optional applications that process I/Q data (where available).
Page 56: Rear Panel View
® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour For models 1312.8000Kxx: 1.00 mm RF input connector for frequencies up to 85 GHz (90 GHz with option R&S FSW-B90G) Risk of instrument damage Do not overload the input. For maximum allowed values, see the data sheet. For AC- coupling, a DC input voltage of 50 V (1.00 mm connector: 25 V) must never be excee- ded.
Page 57 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour Figure 5-3: Rear panel view 1 = Removable system hard drive 2 = AC Power Supply Connection and Main Power Switch 3 = DISPLAY PORT for external display 4 = DVI connector for external display 5 = LAN connector 6 = USB (DEVICE) connectors 7 = Bandwidth Extension 160 MHz/ 320 MHz/ 512 MHz with IF WIDE OUTPUT connector (option -B160/-...
Page 58 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour Main power switch function: Position 1: The instrument is in operation. Position O: The entire instrument is disconnected from the AC power supply. For details, refer to Chapter 5.1.1.4, "Connecting the AC Power", on page 28. 5.2.2.3 DISPLAY PORT and DVI You can connect an external monitor or other display device to the R&S FSW to pro-...
Page 59 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour Together with the bandwidth extension an additional IF output connector is provided ("IF WIDE OUTPUT"). As opposed to the default IF/VIDEO/DEMOD OUTPUT connec- tor, the IF output frequency of the optional connector cannot be defined manually, but is determined automatically depending on the center frequency.
Page 60 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour For details, see the R&S FSW I/Q Analyzer and I/Q Input User Manual. 5.2.2.9 IF/VIDEO/DEMOD OUTPUT The female BNC connector can be used for various outputs: ● Intermediate frequency (IF) output of approximately 20 MHz ●...
Page 61 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour 5.2.2.13 AUX PORT The 9-pole SUB-D male connector provides control signals for controlling external devices. The voltage levels are of the TTL type (max. 5 V). Signal Description +5 V / max. 250 mA Supply voltage for external circuits 2 to 7 Control lines for user ports (see User manual)
Page 62 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour 5.2.2.16 Alignment Signal Source (Option R&S FSW-B2000) The alignment signal source is required to align the connected oscilloscope and the oscilloscope ADC for the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension (R&S FSW-B2000). For details, see the R&S FSW I/Q Analyzer and I/Q Input User Manual. 5.2.2.17 OCXO Option (R&S FSW-B4) This option generates a 10 MHz reference signal with a very precise frequency.
Page 63: Trying Out The Instrument
® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument SYNC TRIGGER The SYNC TRIGGER connector can also be used to synchronize the reference fre- quency on several devices (see Chapter 5.2.2.12, "SYNC TRIGGER OUTPUT/ INPUT", on page 60). 5.3 Trying Out the Instrument This chapter introduces the most important functions and settings of the R&S FSW step by step.
Page 64 ® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument 5. Tap the "Calibration Frequency RF" option. Leave the frequency at the default 64 MHz, with a narrowband spectrum. The calibration signal is now sent to the RF input of the R&S FSW. By default, a continuous frequency sweep is performed, so that the spectrum of the calibration signal is now displayed in the standard level versus frequency diagram.
Page 65: Displaying A Spectrogram
® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument a) In the configuration "Overview", tap the "Amplitude" button. b) In the "Value" field of the "Amplitude" dialog box, enter -25 dBm. The display of the calibration signal is now improved. The maximum at the center frequency (=calibration frequency) of 64 MHz becomes visible.
Page 66 ® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument Since we do not want to replace the spectrum, drag the icon to the lower half of the display to add an additional window instead. Figure 5-6: Adding a Spectrogram to the display Drop the icon.
Page 67: Activating Additional Measurement Channels
® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument Figure 5-7: Spectrogram of the calibration signal 5.3.3 Activating Additional Measurement Channels The R&S FSW features multiple measurement channels, i.e. you can define several measurement configurations in parallel and then switch between the channels auto- matically to perform the measurements sequentially.
Page 68 ® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument Figure 5-8: Adding a new measurement channel 3. Change the frequency range for this spectrum display: In the "Frequency" dialog box, set the center frequency to 500 MHz and the span to 1 GHz. Figure 5-9: Frequency spectrum of the calibration signal with a larger span 4.
Page 69 ® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument As the calibration signal does not vary over time, the level versus time diagram dis- plays a straight line. Figure 5-10: Time domain display of the calibration signal 5. Create a new channel for I/Q analysis: a) Press the [Mode] key.
Page 70: Performing Sequential Measurements
® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument e) Close the SmartGrid mode. The "IQ Analyzer" channel displays the real and imaginary signal parts in separate windows. To display the MultiView tab An overview of all active channels is provided in the "MultiView" tab. This tab is always displayed and cannot be closed.
Page 71: Setting And Moving A Marker
® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument Figure 5-13: "MultiView" tab with active Sequencer Figure 5-13, the "Spectrum 2" measurement is currently active (indicated by the "channel active" icon in the tab label). 3. Stop the Sequencer by tapping the "Sequencer" softkey again. 5.3.5 Setting and Moving a Marker Markers are useful to determine the position of particular effects in the trace.
Page 72: Displaying A Marker Peak List
® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument 6. Now you can move the marker by tapping and dragging it to a different position. The current position is indicated by a dotted blue line. Notice how the position and value change in the marker area of the diagram. 5.3.6 Displaying a Marker Peak List The marker peak list determines the frequencies and levels of peaks in the spectrum automatically.
Page 73: Zooming Into The Display
® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument 2. Press the "RUN SINGLE" key on the front panel to perform a single sweep for which we will determine the peaks. 3. Tap the "SmartGrid" icon in the toolbar to activate SmartGrid mode. 4.
Page 74 ® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument 1. Tap the "Multiple Zoom" icon in the toolbar. The icon is highlighted orange to indicate that multiple zoom mode is active. 2. Tap the diagram near the first peak and drag your finger to the opposite corner of the zoom area.
Page 75 ® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument Figure 5-17: Zoomed peak with increased number of sweep points Note that the trace becomes much more precise. 4. Tap the "Multiple Zoom" icon in the toolbar again and define a zoom area around markers M4, M5 and M6.
Page 76: Zooming Into The Display Permanently
® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument Figure 5-19: Enlarged zoom window 5.3.8 Zooming into the Display Permanently The zoomed results from Chapter 5.3.7, "Zooming into the Display", on page 73 were only graphical changes to the display. Now we would like to change the measurement settings such that the zoomed result is maintained permanently.
Page 77 ® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument 3. Select the (graphical) zoom icon on the toolbar. Any subsequent touch gestures define the zoom area for the zoom display. 4. Place two fingers on the diagram, to the left and right of the marker, and stretch them apart.
Page 78 ® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument 6. Tap the "Measurement Zoom" icon on the toolbar for a second or so. A context menu with further options is displayed. 7. Select "Adapt Hardware to Zoom (selected diagram)". The span of the measurement is changed, and due to the automatic coupling of the span to the sweep time, RBW and VBW, those values are also changed.
Page 79: Saving Settings
® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument 5.3.9 Saving Settings To restore the results of our measurements later, we will store the instrument settings to a file. To save the instrument settings to a file 1. Tap the "Save" icon in the toolbar. 2.
Page 80: Printing And Saving Results
® Getting Started R&S Trying Out the Instrument To load stored instrument settings You can restore the settings to the instrument at any time using the settings file. 1. Press the [PRESET] button to restore the default instrument settings so you can check that the stored user settings are actually restored afterwards.
Page 81: Operating The Instrument
® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Figure 5-21: Screenshot of the current display 5.4 Operating the Instrument This chapter provides an overview on how to work with the R&S FSW. It describes: ● What kind of information is displayed in the diagram area ●...
Page 82: Understanding The Display Information
® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Risk of touchscreen damage Inappropriate tools or excessive force can damage the touchscreen. Observe the following instructions when operating the touchscreen: ● Never touch the screen with ball point pens or other sharp objects, use your fingers instead.
Page 83 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument = Channel bar for firmware and measurement settings 2+3 = Window title bar with diagram-specific (trace) information = Diagram area with marker information = Diagram footer with diagram-specific information, depending on measurement application = Instrument status bar with error messages, progress bar and date/time display Hiding elements in the display You can hide some of the elements in the display, for example the status bar or chan-...
Page 84 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument If many tabs are displayed, select the tab selection list icon at the right end of the chan- nel bar. Select the channel you want to switch to from the list. MultiView tab An additional tab labeled "MultiView"...
Page 85 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Channel-specific settings Beneath the channel name, information on channel-specific settings for the measure- ment is displayed in the channel bar. Channel information varies depending on the active application. In the Spectrum application, the R&S FSW shows the following settings: Table 5-4: Channel settings displayed in the channel bar in the Spectrum application Ref Level Reference level...
Page 86 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument The following types of information are displayed, if applicable. Table 5-5: Common settings displayed in the channel bar "SGL" The sweep is set to single sweep mode. "Sweep The current signal count for measurement tasks that involve a specific number of subse- Count"...
Page 87 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument "LVL" A level offset is applied to the external generator signal (only if external generator control is active). "Inp: Input 2" For R&S FSW85 models with two RF input connectors only: the second input connector "RF2"...
Page 88 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument SAMPLE detector AVERAGE detector RMS detector QUASIPEAK detector (4) Trace Mode Sweep mode: Clrw CLEAR/WRITE MAX HOLD MIN HOLD AVERAGE (Lin/Log/Pwr) View VIEW (5) Smoothing factor Smth Smoothing factor, if enabled. (See "Smoothing" on page 585) Norm/NCor Correction data is not used.
Page 89 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument The functions are indicated with the following abbreviations: Fixed reference marker PHNoise Phase noise measurement Signal count Signal tracking NOIse Noise measurement MDepth AM modulation depth Third order intercept measurement 5.4.1.4 Frequency and Span Information in Diagram Footer The information in the diagram footer (beneath the diagram) depends on the current application, measurement, and result display.
Page 90 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument The optional Digital Baseband Interface (R&S FSW-B17) is being used to provide digital output. For details on the Digital Baseband Interface (R&S FSW-B17), see the R&S FSW I/Q Analyzer User Manual. The optional Digital I/Q 40G Streaming Output Connector (R&S FSW-B517) is being IQ 40G used to provide digital output.
Page 91 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Color Type Description No color No errors No message displayed - normal operation. Green Measurement Some applications visualize that the measurement was successful by show- successful ing a message. If any error information is available for a channel, an exclamation mark is displayed next to the channel name ( ).
Page 92: Accessing The Functionality
® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument RF OVLD Overload of the input mixer or of the analog IF path. ● Increase the RF attenuation (for RF input). ● Reduce the input level (for digital input) UNCAL One of the following conditions applies: ●...
Page 93 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Table 5-8: Standard Application Functions in the Toolbar Icon Description Windows: displays the Windows "Start" menu and task bar Open: opens a file from the instrument ("Save/Recall" menu) Store: stores data on the instrument ("Save/Recall" menu) Print: defines print settings ("Print"...
Page 94 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Icon Description Zoom off: displays the diagram in its original size This function only restores graphically zoomed displays. Measurement zooms, for which mea- surement settings were adapted, remain untouched. Data shift: Shifts the data to be evaluated in the result display and re-evaluates the new data. Currently, this function is only available in the Transient Analysis application.
Page 95 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Recognizing the softkey status by color Color Meaning Orange Associated dialog box is open Blue Associated function is active; for toggle keys: currently active state Gray Instrument function is temporarily not available due to a specific setting or missing option You can hide the softkey display, e.g.
Page 96: Changing The Focus
® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Figure 5-23: Context menu for channel bar setting 5.4.2.4 On-screen Keyboard The on-screen keyboard is an additional means of interacting with the instrument with- out having to connect an external keyboard. The on-screen keyboard display can be switched on and off as desired using the "On- Screen Keyboard"...
Page 97: Entering Data
® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument a blue frame (diagram, window, table) or is otherwise highlighted (softkey, marker etc.). Moving the focus is most easily done by tapping on the element on the touchscreen. Alternatively, use the "Tab" key on the on-screen keyboard or the rotary knob to move the focus from one element to the next on the display.
Page 98 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument 2. After entering the numeric value via keypad, press the corresponding unit key. The unit is added to the entry. 3. If the parameter does not require a unit, confirm the entered value by pressing the [ENTER] key or any of the unit keys.
Page 99: Touchscreen Gestures
® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument 3. Enter your correction. To complete the entry ► Press the [ENTER] key or the rotary knob. To abort the entry ► Press the [ESC] key. The dialog box is closed without changing the settings. Table 5-9: Keys for alphanumeric parameters Key name Series of (special) characters and number provided...
Page 100 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Figure 5-24: Tapping Double-tapping Tap the screen twice, in quick succession. Double-tap a diagram or the window title bar to maximize a window in the display, or to restore the original size. Dragging Move your finger from one position to another on the display, keeping your finger on the display the whole time.
Page 101 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Figure 5-26: Pinching Figure 5-27: Spreading User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 43...
Page 102 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Touch gestures in diagrams change measurement settings When you change the display using touch gestures, the corresponding measurement settings are adapted. This is different to selecting an area on the screen in zoom mode, where merely the resolution of the displayed trace points is changed temporarily (graphical zoom).
Page 103: Displaying Results
® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Mouse operation Touch operation Drag-&-drop (= click and hold, then drag and Touch, then drag and release release) n.a. (Change hardware settings) Spread and pinch two fingers Mouse wheel to scroll up or down Swipe Dragging scrollbars to scroll up or down, left or right Swipe...
Page 104 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument To start a new channel 1. Select the [Mode] key. 2. In the "Mode" dialog box, select the required application on the "New Channel" tab. A new tab is displayed for the new channel. Remote command: on page 824/ INSTrument:CREate[:NEW]...
Page 105 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Select the "Close" icon on the tab of the measurement channel. The tab is closed, any running measurements are aborted, and all results for that channel are deleted. Remote command: on page 825 INSTrument:DELete 5.4.6.2 Laying out the Result Display with the SmartGrid...
Page 106 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Figure 5-28: Moving a window in SmartGrid mode The brown area indicates the possible "drop area" for the window, i.e. the area in which the window can be placed. A blue area indicates the (approximate) layout of the win- dow as it would be if the icon were dropped at the current position.
Page 107 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument SmartGrid functions Once the evaluation icon has been dropped, icons in each window provide delete and move functions. The "Move" icon allows you to move the position of the window, possibly changing the size and position of the other displayed windows.
Page 108 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Remote command: on page 1015 / on page 1019 LAYout:ADD[:WINDow]? LAYout:WINDow<n>:ADD? How to Close a Result Window ► To close a window, activate SmartGrid mode and select the "Delete" icon for the window. Remote command: on page 1017 / LAYout:REMove[:WINDow]...
Page 109 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument 5.4.6.3 Changing the Size of Windows Each channel tab may contain several windows to evaluate the measurement results using different methods. A "splitter" allows you to change the size of neighboring win- dows. The splitters are not available in SmartGrid mode.
Page 110: Getting Help
® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument 5.4.6.5 Changing the Display The display can be optimized for your individual needs. The following display functions are available and are described in detail in Chapter 12.2, "Display Settings", on page 662 and Chapter 9, "Common Analysis and Display Functions", on page 501.
Page 111 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument a) Select the "Help pointer" icon on the toolbar. The pointer changes its shape to a "?" and an arrow. b) Select the screen element to change the focus. A topic containing information about the selected (now focused) screen element is displayed.
Page 112: Remote Control
® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument 2. Select the "Keyboard" icon besides the entry field. 3. Enter the string you want to find. If you enter several strings with blanks between, topics containing all words are found (same as AND operator). For advanced search, consider the following: ●...
Page 113 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument 5.4.8.1 Using the LXI Browser Interface in a LAN LAN eXtensions for Instrumentation (LXI) is an instrumentation platform for measuring instruments and test systems that is based on standard Ethernet technology. LXI is intended to be the LAN-based successor to GPIB, combining the advantages of Ether- net with the simplicity and familiarity of GPIB.
Page 114 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument puter. Remote Desktop provides access to all of the applications, files, and network resources of the instrument. Thus, remote operation of the instrument is possible. The Remote Desktop Client is part of the installed Windows operating system. For other versions of Windows, Microsoft offers the Remote Desktop Client as an add-on.
Page 115: Applications, Measurement Channels, And Operating Modes
® Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes R&S 6 Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes The R&S FSW allows you to perform all sorts of different analysis tasks on different types of signals, e.g. W-CDMA, I/Q analysis or basic spectrum analysis. Depending on the task or type of signal, a different set of measurement functions and parameters are required.
Page 116: Available Applications
® Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes R&S Available Applications Standard Radio Analyzer, unwanted correlations between different signal components using different transmission standards can be detected. Thus, for example, an irregu- larity in a GSM burst can be examined closer in the R&S FSW 3G FDD BTS (W- CDMA) slave application to reveal dependencies like a change in the EVM value.
Page 117: Spectrum
® Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes R&S Available Applications For details on the MSRT operating mode, see the R&S FSW Real-Time Spectrum Application and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual. Spectrogram application Spectrogram measurements are not a separate application, but rather a trace evalua- tion method, thus they are available as an evaluation method for the Display Configu- ration, not by creating a new channel.
Page 118: 1Xev-Do Bts
® Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes R&S Available Applications Remote command: INST:SEL SAN, see on page 828 INSTrument[:SELect] 1xEV-DO BTS The 1xEV-DO BTS application requires an instrument equipped with the 1xEV-DO BTS Measurements option, R&S FSW-K84. This application provides test measurements for 1xEV-DO BTS downlink signals (base station signals) according to the test specifi- cation.
Page 119: Amplifier
® Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes R&S Available Applications For details see the R&S FSW-K144 and R&S FSW-K145 user manuals. Remote command: INST:SEL NR5G, see on page 828 INSTrument[:SELect] 802.11ad The 802.11ad application requires an instrument equipped with the 802.11ad option, R&S FSW-K95.
Page 120: Cdma2000 Ms
® Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes R&S Available Applications Remote command: INST:SEL BC2K, see on page 828 INSTrument[:SELect] cdma2000 MS The cdma2000 MS application requires an instrument equipped with the cdma2000 MS Measurements option, R&S FSW-K83. This application provides test measure- ments for cdma2000 MS uplink signals (mobile signals) according to the test specifica- tion.
Page 121: Noise Figure
® Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes R&S Available Applications Remote command: INST:SEL NIOT, see on page 828 INSTrument[:SELect] Noise Figure The Noise Figure application requires an instrument equipped with the Noise Figure Measurements option R&S FSW-K30. This application provides noise figure measure- ments.
Page 122: Spurious Measurements
® Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes R&S Available Applications Spurious Measurements The Spurious Measurements application requires an instrument equipped with the Spurious Measurements option, R&S FSW-K50. This application provides measure- ments and evaluations for spurious signal effects. For details see the R&S FSW-K50 User Manual. Remote command: INST:SEL SPUR, see on page 828...
Page 123: R&S Multiview
® Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes R&S R&S MultiView Vector Signal Analysis (VSA) The VSA application requires an instrument equipped with the Vector Signal Analysis option, R&S FSW-K70. This application provides measurements and evaluations for single-carrier digitally modulated signals. For details see the R&S FSW-K70 User Manual.
Page 124: Selecting The Operating Mode And Applications
® Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes R&S Selecting the Operating Mode and Applications Remote command: on page 1014 DISPlay:FORMat 6.3 Selecting the Operating Mode and Applications Access: [MODE] The default operating mode is Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode, however, the pre- setting can be changed (see "Preset Mode"...
Page 125 ® Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes R&S Selecting the Operating Mode and Applications The default application in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode is a Spectrum measure- ment. Switching between applications When you switch to a new application, a set of parameters is passed on from the cur- rent application to the new one: ●...
Page 126: Running A Sequence Of Measurements
® Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes R&S Running a Sequence of Measurements Remote command: on page 828 INSTrument[:SELect] New Channel ← Selecting an application The applications selected on this tab are started in a new measurement channel, i.e. a new tab in the display.
Page 127: The Sequencer Concept
® Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes R&S Running a Sequence of Measurements 6.4.1 The Sequencer Concept The instrument can only activate one specific channel at any time. Thus, only one measurement can be performed at any time, namely the one in the currently active channel.
Page 128 ® Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes R&S Running a Sequence of Measurements Example: Sequencer procedure Assume the following active channel definition: Tab name Application Sweep mode Sweep count Spectrum Spectrum Cont. Sweep Spectrum 2 Spectrum Single Sweep Spectrum 3 Spectrum Cont.
Page 129: Sequencer Settings
® Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes R&S Running a Sequence of Measurements The "Single Sweep" and "Continuous Sweep" softkeys control the sweep mode for the currently selected channel only; the sweep mode only has an effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel, and only for a channel-defined sequence.
Page 130: How To Set Up The Sequencer
® Applications, Measurement Channels, and Operating Modes R&S Running a Sequence of Measurements Remote command: on page 830 INITiate:SEQuencer:MODE 6.4.3 How to Set Up the Sequencer In order to perform the configured measurements consecutively, a Sequencer function is provided. 1. Configure a channel for each measurement configuration as required, including the sweep mode.
Page 131: Measurements And Results
® Measurements and Results R&S 7 Measurements and Results Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" Or: [MEAS] In the Spectrum application, the R&S FSW provides a variety of different measurement functions. ● Basic measurements - measure the spectrum of your signal or watch your signal in time domain ●...
Page 132: Basic Measurements
® Measurements and Results R&S Basic Measurements Measurements on I/Q-based data The I/Q Analyzer application (not Master) in MSRA mode can also perform measure- ments on the captured I/Q data in the time and frequency domain. The measurements are configured using the same settings as described here for the Spectrum application.
Page 133: How To Perform A Basic Sweep Measurement
® Measurements and Results R&S Basic Measurements Frequency Sweep A common frequency sweep of the input signal over a specified span. Can be used for general purposes to obtain basic measurement results such as peak levels and spec- trum traces. The "Frequency" menu is displayed. This is the default measurement if no other function is selected.
Page 134: Measurement Examples - Measuring A Sinusoidal Signal
® Measurements and Results R&S Basic Measurements 2. Configure the number of sweeps to be performed in a single measurement ("Sweep Config" dialog box, see "Sweep/Average Count" on page 470). 3. If necessary, configure how the signal is processed internally ("Bandwidth" dialog box, see "Sweep Type"...
Page 135 ® Measurements and Results R&S Basic Measurements High input values If levels higher than +30 dBm (=1 W) are expected or are possible, a power attenuator must be inserted before the RF input of the analyzer. Otherwise, signal levels exceed- ing 30 dBm can damage the RF attenuator or the input mixer.
Page 136 ® Measurements and Results R&S Basic Measurements Increasing the Frequency Resolution The frequency resolution of the marker is determined by the resolution of the trace. A trace consists of 1001 trace points, i.e. if the frequency span is 1 MHz, each trace point represents a span of approximately 1 kHz.
Page 137: Measurement Example - Measuring Levels At Low S/N Ratios
® Measurements and Results R&S Basic Measurements 7.1.3.2 Measuring the Signal Frequency Using the Signal Counter The built-in signal counter allows you to measure the frequency more accurately than measuring it with the marker. The frequency sweep is stopped at the marker, and the R&S FSW measures the frequency of the signal at the marker position (see also Chap- ter 9.3.4.1, "Precise Frequency (Signal Count)
Page 138 ® Measurements and Results R&S Basic Measurements The displayed noise level of a signal analyzer depends on its noise figure, the selected RF attenuation, the selected reference level, the selected resolution and video band- width and the detector. For details see: ●...
Page 139 ® Measurements and Results R&S Basic Measurements The traces of consecutive sweeps are averaged. To perform averaging, the R&S FSW automatically switches on the sample detector. The RF signal, therefore, can be more clearly distinguished from noise. Figure 7-2: RF sine wave signal with low S/N ratio with an averaged trace 6.
Page 140: Measurement Examples - Measuring Signal Spectra With Multiple Signals
® Measurements and Results R&S Basic Measurements 7. By reducing the resolution bandwidth by a factor of 10, the noise is reduced by 10 dB. Set the RBW to 100 kHz. The displayed noise is reduced by approximately 10 dB. The signal, therefore, emerges from noise by about 10 dB.
Page 141 ® Measurements and Results R&S Basic Measurements is equal to the frequency spacing, the spectrum display shows a level drop of 3 dB pre- cisely in the center of the two signals. Decreasing the resolution bandwidth makes the level drop larger, which thus makes the individual signals clearer. In this measurement example we will analyze two signals with a level of -30 dBm each and a frequency spacing of 30 kHz.
Page 142 ® Measurements and Results R&S Basic Measurements Figure 7-6: Measurement of two equally-leveled RF sinusoidal signals with the resolution band- width which corresponds to the frequency spacing of the signals Matching generator and R&S FSW frequencies The level drop is located exactly in the center of the display only if the generator frequencies match the frequency display of the R&S FSW exactly.
Page 143 ® Measurements and Results R&S Basic Measurements Figure 7-7: Measurement of two equally-leveled RF sinusoidal signals with a resolution band- width which is larger than their frequency spacing 6. Set the resolution bandwidth to 1 kHz. The two generator signals are shown with high resolution. However, the sweep time becomes longer.
Page 144 ® Measurements and Results R&S Basic Measurements 7.1.5.2 Measuring the Modulation Depth of an AM-Modulated Carrier in the Frequency Domain In the frequency range display, the AM side bands can be resolved with a narrow bandwidth and measured separately. The modulation depth of a carrier modulated with a sinusoidal signal can then be measured.
Page 145 ® Measurements and Results R&S Basic Measurements Figure 7-10: Measurement of the AM modulation depth The modulation depth is displayed as "MDepth". The frequency of the AF signal can be obtained from the frequency display of the delta marker. 7.1.5.3 Measuring AM-Modulated Signals The R&S FSW rectifies the RF input signal (that is, removes the negative parts) and displays it as a magnitude spectrum.
Page 146: Measurement Examples In Zero Span
® Measurements and Results R&S Basic Measurements 3. Set the frequency span to 0 Hz or select "Zero Span". 4. Set the sweep time to 2.5 ms. 5. Set the reference level to 6 dBm and the display range to linear ([AMPT] > "Scale Config"...
Page 147 ® Measurements and Results R&S Basic Measurements same frequency. Smooth operation is ensured only if all users adhere exactly to their assigned timeslots. Both the power during the send phase as well as the timing and duration of the TDMA burst, and rise and fall times of the burst, are important.
Page 148 ® Measurements and Results R&S Basic Measurements 9. Activate power measurement within the activation phase of the burst in zero span. a) Press the [MEAS] key. b) Select "Time Domain Power". c) Select "Time Dom Power Config". d) Set the "Limits" state to "On". e) Select the "Left Limit"...
Page 149 ® Measurements and Results R&S Basic Measurements Table 7-7: Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMW) Frequency 890 MHz Level 0 dBm Modulation GSM, one timeslot activated The measurement is based on the example "Measuring the Power of a GSM Burst During the Activation Phase"...
Page 150 ® Measurements and Results R&S Basic Measurements Figure 7-17: Falling edge of the GSM burst displayed with high time resolution 7.1.6.2 Measuring the Signal-to-Noise Ratio of Burst Signals When TDMA transmission methods are used, the signal-to-noise ratio or the dynamic range for deactivation can be measured by comparing the power values during the activation phase and the deactivation phase of the transmission burst.
Page 151 ® Measurements and Results R&S Basic Measurements 5. Set the reference level to 0 dBm (= level of the signal generator). 6. Set the sweep time to 2 ms ([SWEEP] > "Sweep Time Manual"). The R&S FSW shows the GSM burst continuously across the display. 7.
Page 152: Channel Power And Adjacent-Channel Power (Aclr) Measurement
® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement 10. Note down the power result for the measured noise, indicated by the "TD Pow RMS" result in the marker table. Subtract the measured noise power from the burst power to obtain the signal-to- noise ratio of the burst signal.
Page 153: Channel Power Results
® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement The R&S FSW software allows you to perform ACLR measurements on input contain- ing multiple signals for different communication standards. A measurement standard is provided that allows you to define multiple discontiguous transmit channels at specified frequencies, independent from the selected center frequency.
Page 154 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Table 7-9: Measurements performed depending on the number of adjacent channels Number Measurement results of adj. chan. Channel powers ● Channel powers ● Power of the upper and lower adjacent channel ●...
Page 155: Channel Power Basics
® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement this case, the measured power value for each sweep point (by default 1001) is returned. For a full list of remote commands for ACLR measurements, see Chapter 14.5.3.9, "Retrieving and Analyzing Measurement Results", on page 888.
Page 156 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Figure 7-20: Approximating the channel filter by sweeping with a small resolution bandwidth The following steps are performed: 1. The linear power of all the trace points within the channel is calculated. = 10 (Li/10) Where P...
Page 157 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Figure 7-21: Measuring the channel power and adjacent channel power ratio for CDMA2000 signals with zero span (Fast ACLR) 7.2.3.2 Measurement Repeatability The repeatability of the results, especially in the narrow adjacent channels, strongly depends on the measurement time for a given resolution bandwidth.
Page 158 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Figure 7-22: Repeatability of adjacent channel power measurement on CDMA2000 standard signals if the integration bandwidth method is used Figure 7-23 shows the repeatability of power measurements in the transmit chan- nel and of relative power measurements in the adjacent channels as a function of sweep time.
Page 159 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement All instrument settings for the selected channel setup (channel bandwidth, channel spacing) can be optimized automatically using the "Adjust Settings" function (see "Opti- mized Settings (Adjust Settings)" on page 173). The easiest way to configure a measurement is using the configuration "Overview", Chapter 8.1, "Configuration Overview",...
Page 160 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement The "Sweep Time" can be defined using the softkey in the "Ch Power" menu or in the "Sweep" configuration dialog box (see "Sweep Time" on page 173). Frequency Span The frequency span must cover at least the channels to be measured plus a measure- ment margin of approximately 10 %.
Page 161 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement You can optimize the resolution bandwidth for the defined channel settings. Use the "Adjust Settings" function in the "Ch Power" menu or the "General Settings" tab of the "ACLR Setup"...
Page 162 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement = power represented by a measurement point When the power has been calculated, the power units are converted into decibels and the value is displayed as a measurement point. In principle, the sample detector would be possible as well.
Page 163 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement those in the lower gap, but inverted. To either side of the outermost transmit channels, lower and upper adjacent channels can be defined as in common ACLR measurement setups.
Page 164 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Figure 7-26: Sub block definition As opposed to common ACLR channel definitions, the Tx channels are defined at absolute frequencies, rather than by a spacing relative to the (common) center fre- quency.
Page 165 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Figure 7-27: Gap channel definition for lower gap If the gap channels are not symmetrical, you must configure up to four channels indi- vidually. The formula indicated above applies for the lower channels. For the upper channels, the spacing is defined as: Spacing = [right sub block CF]- [CF of gap channel] - ([RF bandwidth of right sub block] /2)
Page 166 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement ● The spacing of the upper adjacent channels refers to the CF of the last Tx channel in the last sub block. The upper and lower adjacent channels can also be defined asymmetrically (see "Sym- metrical Adjacent Setup"...
Page 167 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement of a total Tx channel power. Instead of the individual channel frequency offsets, the absolute center frequencies are indicated for the transmit channels. The CACLR and ACLR power results for each gap channel are appended at the end of the table.
Page 168: Channel Power Configuration
® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement 7.2.4 Channel Power Configuration Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Channel Power ACLR" > "CP / ACLR Config" Both Channel Power (CP) and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) measurements are available.
Page 169 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Number of channels: Tx, Adj..................170 Reference Channel..................... 171 Noise Cancellation...................... 171 Fast ACLR........................172 Selected Trace......................172 Absolute and Relative Values (ACLR Mode).............. 172 Channel power level and density (Power Unit)............
Page 170 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement In addition to the predefined standards, you can save your own standards with your specific measurement settings in an XML file so you can use them again later. User- defined standards are stored on the instrument in the C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\acp_std direc- tory.
Page 171 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Results are provided for the Tx channel and the number of defined adjacent channels above and below the Tx channel. If more than one Tx channel is defined, the carrier channel to which the relative adjacent-channel power values should be referenced must be defined (see "Reference Channel"...
Page 172 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement ● ● Average ● Sample ● Positive peak Remote command: on page 1041 [SENSe:]POWer:NCORrection Fast ACLR If activated, instead of using the IBW method, the R&S FSW sets the center frequency to the different channel center frequencies consecutively and measures the power with the selected measurement time (= sweep time/number of channels).
Page 173 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Power Mode The measured power values can be displayed directly for each trace ("Clear/ Write"), or only the maximum values over a series of measurements can be displayed ("Max Hold").
Page 174 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Remote command: on page 1037 [SENSe<n>:]SWEep:TIME 7.2.4.2 Channel Setup The "Channel Settings" tab in the "ACLR Setup" dialog box provides all the channel settings to configure the channel power or ACLR measurement. You can define the channel settings for all channels, independent of the defined number of used Tx or adjacent channels (see "Number of channels: Tx, Adj"...
Page 175 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement The Tx channel bandwidth is normally defined by the transmission standard. The correct bandwidth is set automatically for the selected standard. The bandwidth for each channel is indicated by a colored bar in the display. For measurements that require channel bandwidths which deviate from those defined in the selected standard, use the IBW method ("Fast ACLR"...
Page 176 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Remote command: on page 847 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:CHANnel<ch> on page 846 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing[:ACHannel] on page 847 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ALTernate<ch> Limit Check During an ACLR measurement, the power values can be checked whether they exceed user-defined or standard-defined limits.
Page 177: Msr Aclr Configuration
® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement on page 850 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:ALTernate<ch> Alpha value: on page 849 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:CHANnel<ch> on page 848 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:ACHannel on page 848 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:ALTernate<ch> Channel Names In the R&S FSW's display, carrier channels are labeled "Tx" by default; the first neigh- boring channel is labeled "Adj"...
Page 178 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Standard........................178 └ Predefined Standards................... 179 └ User Standards..................... 179 Number of Sub Blocks....................180 Reference Channel..................... 180 Noise Cancellation...................... 180 Selected Trace......................181 Absolute and Relative Values (ACLR Mode)..............
Page 179 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Predefined Standards ← Standard Predefined standards contain the main measurement settings for standard measure- ments. When such a standard is loaded, the required channel settings are automati- cally set on the R&S FSW. However, you can change the settings. The predefined standards contain the following settings: ●...
Page 180 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement For details see Chapter 7.2.6.4, "How to Manage User-Defined Configurations", on page 198. Remote command: To query all available standards: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:STANdard:CATalog? on page 842 To load a standard: on page 842 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:PRESet To save a standard:...
Page 181 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement The inherent noise of the instrument depends on the selected center frequency, resolu- tion bandwidth and level setting. Therefore, the correction function is disabled when- ever one of these parameters is changed. A disable message is displayed on the screen.
Page 182 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Power Mode The measured power values can be displayed directly for each trace ("Clear/ Write"), or only the maximum values over a series of measurements can be displayed ("Max Hold").
Page 183 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement 7.2.5.2 MSR Sub Block and Tx Channel Definition Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Channel Power ACLR" > "CP / ACLR Standard" > "Standard": "Multi-Standard Radio" > "CP / ACLR Config" > "Tx Channels" The "Tx Channels"...
Page 184 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Sub Block Definition Sub blocks are groups of transmit channels in an MSR signal. Up to 8 sub blocks can be defined. They are defined as an RF bandwidth around a center frequency with a specific number of transmit channels (max.
Page 185 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Technology Used for Transmission ← Tx Channel Definition The technology used for transmission by the individual channel can be defined for each channel. The required channel bandwidth and use of a weighting filter are pre- configured automatically according to the selected technology standard.
Page 186 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement For symmetrical channel definition (see "Symmetrical Adjacent Setup" on page 182), the dialog box is reduced as the upper and lower channels are identical. Figure 7-30: Asymmetrical adjacent channel definition For details on setting up channels, see Chapter 7.2.6.3, "How to Configure an MSR ACLR...
Page 187 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Adjacent Channel Definition Defines the channels adjacent to the transmission channel block in MSR signals. A maximum of 12 adjacent channels can be defined. For MSR signals, adjacent channels are defined in relation to the center frequency of the first and last transmission channel in the entire block, i.e.: ●...
Page 188 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement on page 850 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:ALTernate<ch> on page 866 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:UACHannel on page 866 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:UALTernate<ch> Alpha value: on page 848 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:ACHannel on page 848 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:ALTernate<ch> on page 865 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:UACHannel on page 865 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:UALTernate<ch>...
Page 189 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Figure 7-31: Symmetrical (auto) gap channel configuration Figure 7-32: Asymmetrical (manual) gap channel configuration For details on MSR signals, see Chapter 7.2.3.4, "Measurement on Multi-Standard Radio (MSR) Signals", on page 162.
Page 190 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Activate Gaps......................190 Mode........................190 Gap Channel Definition....................190 └ Minimum gap size to show Gap 1/ Minimum gap size to show Gap 2..191 └ Number of Lower Gap Channels..............
Page 191 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Minimum gap size to show Gap 1/ Minimum gap size to show Gap 2 ← Gap Channel Definition If the gap between the sub blocks does not exceed the specified bandwidth, the gap channels are not displayed in the diagram.
Page 192 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Figure 7-33: Gap channel definition for lower gap For details, see Chapter 7.2.6.3, "How to Configure an MSR ACLR Measurement", on page 196. Remote command: on page 872 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:GAP<gap>[:AUTO] For manual (asymmetrical) configuration: on page 885...
Page 193 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Remote command: on page 871 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:GAP<gap>[:AUTO] on page 871 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:GAP<gap>[:AUTO] For manual (asymmetrical) configuration: [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer on page 882 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer on page 883 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer on page 883 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer on page 884 Limit Checking ←...
Page 194: How To Perform Channel Power Measurements
® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Figure 7-34: Channel name definition for asymmetric adjacent channels Remote command: on page 887 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:NAME[:CHANnel<ch>] on page 845 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:ACHannel on page 846 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:ALTernate<ch> on page 887 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:UACHannel on page 887 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:UALTernate<ch>...
Page 195 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement ● How to Perform a Standard Channel Power Measurement........195 ● How to Set Up the Channels.................195 ● How to Configure an MSR ACLR Measurement...........196 ● How to Manage User-Defined Configurations............198 ●...
Page 196 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Changes to an existing standard can be stored as a user-defined standard, see Chap- ter 7.2.6.4, "How to Manage User-Defined Configurations", on page 198. ► To configure the channels in the "Ch Power" dialog box, select "Ch Power" > "CP / ACLR Config"...
Page 197 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement 5. Select the "CP / ACLR Config" softkey to configure general MSR settings, including the number of sub blocks (up to 8). To configure asymmetric adjacent channels, deactivate the "Symmetrical" option in the general MSR settings.
Page 198 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement 12. Optionally, store the settings for the MSR ACLR measurement as a user-defined standard as described in "To store a user-defined configuration" on page 198. Oth- erwise the configuration is lost when you select a different measurement standard. 7.2.6.4 How to Manage User-Defined Configurations You can define measurement configurations independently of a predefined standard...
Page 199: Measurement Examples
® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement 7.2.6.5 How to Compare the Tx Channel Power in Successive Measurements For power measurements with only one Tx channel and no adjacent channels, you can define a fixed reference power and compare subsequent measurement results to the stored reference power.
Page 200 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMW): Frequency: 850 MHz Level: 0 dBm Modulation: CDMA2000 Procedure: 1. Preset the R&S FSW. 2. Set the center frequency to 850 MHz. 3.
Page 201 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Figure 7-35: Adjacent channel power measurement on a CDMA2000 signal 7.2.7.2 Measurement Example 2 – Measuring Adjacent Channel Power of a W-CDMA Uplink Signal Test setup: Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMW): Frequency: 1950 MHz Level:...
Page 202 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement The R&S FSW sets the channel configuration to the W-CDMA standard for mobiles with two adjacent channels above and below the transmit channel. The frequency span, the resolution and video bandwidth and the detector are automatically set to the correct values.
Page 203 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Figure 7-37: Dynamic range for ACLR measurements on W-CDMA uplink signals as a function of the mixer level The level of the W-CDMA signal at the input mixer is shown on the horizontal axis, i.e. the measured signal level minus the selected RF attenuation.
Page 204 ® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement 7.2.7.3 Measurement Example 3 – Measuring the Intrinsic Noise of the R&S FSW with the Channel Power Function Noise in any bandwidth can be measured with the channel power measurement func- tions.
Page 205: Optimizing And Troubleshooting The Measurement
® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Figure 7-38: Measurement of the R&S FSW's intrinsic noise power in a 1.23 MHz channel band- width. 7.2.8 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement If the results do not meet your expectations, or if you want to minimize the measure- ment duration, try the following methods to optimize the measurement: ●...
Page 206: Reference: Predefined Cp/Aclr Standards
® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement 7.2.9 Reference: Predefined CP/ACLR Standards When using predefined standards for ACLR measurement, the test parameters for the channel and adjacent-channel measurements are configured automatically. You can select a predefined standard via the "CP / ACLR Standard" softkey in the "Ch Power"...
Page 207: Reference: Predefined Aclr User Standard Xml Files
® Measurements and Results R&S Channel Power and Adjacent-Channel Power (ACLR) Measurement Standard Remote parameter APCO-25 P2 PAPCo25 5G NR DL FR1 20MHz F1D20nr5g 5G NR DL FR1 100MHz F1D100nr5g 5G NR UL FR1 20MHz F1U20nr5g 5G NR UL FR1 100MHz F1U100nr5g 5G NR DL FR2 100MHz F2D100nr5g...
Page 208: Carrier-To-Noise Measurements
® Measurements and Results R&S Carrier-to-Noise Measurements ● 5GNR\UL\5GNR_UL_FR1_100MHz ● 5GNR\UL\5GNR_UL_FR2_100MHz ● 5GNR\UL\5GNR_UL_FR2_200MHz LTE\DL ● LTE\DL\LTE_DL_5MHZ.XML ● LTE\DL\LTE_DL_10MHZ.XML ● LTE\DL\LTE_DL_15MHZ.XML ● LTE\DL\LTE_DL_20MHZ.XML LTE\UL ● LTE\UL\LTE_UL_5MHZ.XML ● LTE\UL\LTE_UL_10MHZ.XML ● LTE\UL\LTE_UL_15MHZ.XML ● LTE\UL\LTE_UL_20MHZ.XML WLAN ● WLAN\802_11ac\802_11ac_20MHZ.XML ● WLAN\802_11ac\802_11ac_40MHZ.XML ● WLAN\802_11ac\802_11ac_80MHZ.XML ● WLAN\802_11ac\802_11ac_160MHZ.XML To load a stored measurement configuration, in the "General Settings"...
Page 209: Carrier-To-Noise Results
® Measurements and Results R&S Carrier-to-Noise Measurements To determine the noise power, a channel with a defined bandwidth at the defined cen- ter frequency is analyzed. The power within this channel is integrated to obtain the noise power level. (If the carrier is within this channel, an extra step is required to determine the correct noise power level, see below.) The noise power of the channel is subtracted from the maximum carrier signal level, and in the case of a C/N...
Page 210: Carrier-To-Noise Configuration
® Measurements and Results R&S Carrier-to-Noise Measurements Remote command: You can also query the determined carrier-to-noise ratio via the remote command CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? CN or CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? CN0, see on page 837. CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:RESult? 7.3.3 Carrier-to-Noise Configuration Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "C/N"/"C/N0" > "Carrier Noise Config" Both a carrier-to-noise ratio (C/N) and a carrier-to-noise ratio in relation to the band- width (C/N ) measurement are available.
Page 211 ® Measurements and Results R&S Carrier-to-Noise Measurements The easiest way to configure a measurement is using the configuration "Overview", Chapter 8.1, "Configuration Overview", on page 356. The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chap- ter 14.5.4, "Measuring the Carrier-to-Noise Ratio", on page 899.
Page 212: How To Determine The Carrier-To-Noise Ratio
® Measurements and Results R&S Occupied Bandwidth Measurement (OBW) 7.3.4 How to Determine the Carrier-to-Noise Ratio The following step-by-step instructions demonstrate how to determine the carrier-to- noise ratio. For remote operation, see "Programming example: Measuring the carrier-to-noise ratio" on page 899. 1.
Page 213 ® Measurements and Results R&S Occupied Bandwidth Measurement (OBW) Measurement principle The bandwidth containing 99% of the signal power is to be determined, for example. The algorithm first calculates the total power of all displayed points of the trace. In the next step, the points from the right edge of the trace are summed up until 0.5 % of the total power is reached.
Page 214: Obw Results
® Measurements and Results R&S Occupied Bandwidth Measurement (OBW) ● RBW << occupied bandwidth (approx. 1/20 of occupied bandwidth, for voice com- munication type: 300 Hz or 1 kHz) ● VBW ≥ 3 x RBW ● RMS detector ● Span ≥ 2 to 3 x occupied bandwidth Some of the measurement specifications (e.g.
Page 215: Obw Configuration
® Measurements and Results R&S Occupied Bandwidth Measurement (OBW) CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? COBW, see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion: on page 837 POWer<sb>:RESult? 7.4.3 OBW Configuration Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "OBW" > "OBW Config" This measurement is not available in zero span. Configuring search limits for OBW measurement The OBW measurement uses the same search limits as defined for marker search (see "Search Limits"...
Page 216 ® Measurements and Results R&S Occupied Bandwidth Measurement (OBW) % Power Bandwidth Defines the percentage of total power in the displayed frequency range which defines the occupied bandwidth. Values from 10 % to 99.9 % are allowed. Remote command: on page 901 [SENSe:]POWer:BANDwidth Channel Bandwidth Defines the channel bandwidth for the transmission channel in single-carrier measure-...
Page 217: How To Determine The Occupied Bandwidth
® Measurements and Results R&S Occupied Bandwidth Measurement (OBW) Remote command: on page 1159 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe] on page 1161 CALCulate<n>:THReshold:STATe 7.4.4 How to Determine the Occupied Bandwidth The following step-by-step instructions demonstrate how to determine the occupied bandwidth. For remote operation, see Chapter 14.5.5.2, "Programming Example: OBW Measure- ment", on page 901.
Page 218: Measurement Example
® Measurements and Results R&S Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement 7. Change the search limits so the search area contains the next carrier signal as described in step The OBW is recalculated and the result for the next carrier is displayed. A new sweep is not necessary! 8.
Page 219: About Noise Power Ratio (Npr) Measurements
® Measurements and Results R&S Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement This measurement requires the Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement firmware option R&S FSW-K19. ● About Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurements..........219 ● Basics......................219 ● Results......................221 ● Configuration....................222 ● Generator Setup....................226 ●...
Page 220 ® Measurements and Results R&S Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement Notches and their effects on the measurement results You can select from an automatic measurement mode that selects the integration bandwidth automatically, and a manual measurement mode that allows you to define a custom integration bandwidth.
Page 221: Npr Results
® Measurements and Results R&S Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement configure the notches once. The analyzer can then automatically set the generator to the same settings. Generator control by the R&S FSW has the following preconditions on the signal gen- erator: ●...
Page 222: Npr Configuration
® Measurements and Results R&S Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement In the result summary, the following results are provided for the specified channel and individual notches: Table 7-11: Noise Power Ratio result summary parameters Parameter Description "Channel" / "Notch" Channel or notch number "Channel BW"...
Page 223 ® Measurements and Results R&S Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement The R&S FSW noise power ratio measurement allows you to specify your satellite channel and up to 25 notch filters in your measurement setup. For a more general measurement, the bandwidth on which the total power density is based can be selected freely.
Page 224 ® Measurements and Results R&S Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement Notch Bandwidth (Absolute / Relative to Channel BW)..........225 Generator Notch State....................225 Upload all Notch Settings to Generator...............226 Query all Notch Settings from Generator..............226 Channel Bandwidth Defines the channel bandwidth on which the total power density is based. The band- width is positioned around the currently defined Center Frequency.
Page 225 ® Measurements and Results R&S Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement This setting is only available if Generator Control State (FSW -> SMW) is enabled. Its value is only sent to the signal generator when you select Upload all Generator Setup Settings to Generator.
Page 226: Generator Setup
® Measurements and Results R&S Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement Note: on the R&S FSW, all notches are always active. The "Generator Notch State" parameter determines whether the individual notch is considered by the generator or not. Remote command: on page 911 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>[:STATe] on page 910 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:STATe:CSTate?
Page 227 ® Measurements and Results R&S Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement The general settings required to control a connected signal generator by the R&S FSW are defined here. The control settings are only available if a connection to a signal gen- erator has been established.
Page 228 ® Measurements and Results R&S Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement Level Offset......................... 230 Reference Frequency....................230 Standard........................230 ARB Waveform File.....................230 Upload all Generator Setup Settings to Generator............. 231 Query all Generator Setup Settings from Generator...........231 Signal Generator IP Address Indicates the state and address of a connected signal generator. The LED indicates the following connection states: ●...
Page 229 ® Measurements and Results R&S Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement Connect/Disconnect ← Signal Generator IP Address The R&S FSW attempts to establish a connection to the signal generator, or discon- nects it. If an instrument is connected, the following information is displayed: ●...
Page 230 ® Measurements and Results R&S Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement Frequency Defines the frequency of the signal provided by the signal generator. If the Generator Frequency Coupling State is active, this value is read-only and indi- cates the resulting frequency setting on the generator. Remote command: on page 906 CONFigure:GENerator:FREQuency:CENTer...
Page 231: Generator Frequency Coupling
® Measurements and Results R&S Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement Upload all Generator Setup Settings to Generator Applies all generator setup settings defined on this tab to the connected signal genera- tor once. This is useful directly after activating generator control, for example, or when you change settings on the generator.
Page 232 ® Measurements and Results R&S Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement The overall status of the frequency coupling is indicated by an LED next to the fre- quency definition. The LED indicates the following states: ● green: frequency setting valid ● red: frequency value cannot be applied on the signal generator ●...
Page 233: How To Perform Npr Measurements
® Measurements and Results R&S Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement Analyzer Sets the analyzer (center) frequency, which is used as a basis for the variable fre- quency definition. Remote command: on page 1025 [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer Numerator Defines the numerator of the frequency-defining factor. Note that this factor also affects the (absolute) Notch Bandwidth (Absolute / Relative to Channel BW)
Page 234: Measurement Example
® Measurements and Results R&S Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurement 9. For each notch, define the bandwidth (absolute or relative to the channel band- width) and its position (relative to the center frequency). The channel and notches are indicated in the spectrum diagram, and the power results are indicated in the result summary.
Page 235: Spectrum Emission Mask (Sem) Measurement
® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement 5. Select "Noise Power Measurement". 6. Select the "NPR Config" softkey. 7. Specify the "Channel Bandwidth" = 72 MHz. 8. Enter the "Number of notches" = 2. 9. For notch 1, define: ●...
Page 236: About The Measurement
® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement ● How to Perform a Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement........267 ● Measurement Example: Multi-SEM Measurement..........272 ● Reference: SEM File Descriptions................ 273 7.6.1 About the Measurement The Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) measurement defines a measurement that moni- tors compliance with a spectral mask.
Page 237 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Multi-SEM measurements Multi-SEM measurements are SEM measurements with more than one sub block. In these measurements, each sub block has its own power class definitions. In this case, the power class is not indicated in the graphical result displays. Example: For example, in Figure...
Page 238 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Label Description "RBW" RBW of the range "Frequency" Frequency of the peak power level "Power Abs" Absolute peak power level within the range "Power Rel" Peak power level within the range, relative to the "Tx Power" "ΔLimit"...
Page 239: Sem Basics
® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Figure 7-44: SEM results for multiple sub blocks Retrieving results via remote control The measurement results of the spectrum emission mask test can be retrieved using the CALC:LIM:FAIL? command from a remote computer; see CALCulate<n>: on page 1224 for a detailed description.
Page 240: Ranges And Range Settings
® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement 7.6.4.1 Ranges and Range Settings In the Spectrum Emission Mask measurements, a range defines a segment for which you can define the following parameters separately: ● Start and stop frequency ●...
Page 241 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement ● The maximum number of ranges is 30. ● The minimum number of ranges is 3. ● The reference range cannot be deleted. ● Center the reference range on the center frequency. ●...
Page 242: Limit Lines In Sem Measurements
® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement limits for the signal levels can be defined differently for varying input levels. For instance, for higher input levels a transmission standard can allow for higher power lev- els in adjacent channels, whereas for lower input levels the allowed deviation can be stricter.
Page 243 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Table 7-12: Limit check types Limit check type Pass/fail criteria Limit line definition "Absolute" Absolute power levels must not Defined by the "Abs Limit Start"/ "Abs Limit exceed limit line Stop"...
Page 244: Fast Sem Measurements
® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Although a margin functionality is not available for the limit check, a margin (threshold) for the peak values to be displayed in the Result Summary can be defined. (In the "List Evaluation"...
Page 245 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Fast SEM not supported for multiple sub blocks For SEM with multiple sub blocks, fast SEM is not available. If more than one sub block is defined and a standard is loaded which contains an active fast SEM setting, this setting is disabled.
Page 246: Multi-Standard Radio (Msr) Sem Measurements
® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement 7.6.4.4 Multi-Standard Radio (MSR) SEM Measurements Multi-standard radio (MSR) measurements allow you to perform SEM tests on signals with multiple carriers using different digital standards. MSR measurements are descri- bed in the specification 3GPP TS 37.141. Various typical combinations of standards for base station tests are described, e.g.
Page 247 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Fast SEM not supported for multiple sub blocks For SEM with multiple sub blocks, fast SEM is not available. If more than one sub block is defined and a standard is loaded which contains an active fast SEM setting, this setting is disabled.
Page 248 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement This leads to the following combinations for overlapping ranges: ● "MAX"+"MAX": maximum of the two limit lines is used ● "MAX"+"SUM": maximum of the two limit lines is used ● "SUM"+"SUM": sum of the two limit lines (calculated for linear powers) is used ●...
Page 249 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Table 7-13: Limit lines in overlapping ranges crossing the mid-frequency Initial situation: overlapping ranges Result: Subranges 4a and 5a are created left and right of the mid-frequency; Range 4 ("None") + Range 5 ("None") overlap and cross the mid-frequency between sub blocks 1 and 2 For subrange 4a: limit line and parameters of range 4 apply For subrange 5a: limit line and parameters of range 5 apply...
Page 250: Sem Configuration
® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Figure 7-47: Summarized limit line for multiple sub blocks 7.6.5 SEM Configuration Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Spectrum Emission Mask" The SEM measurement is started immediately with the default settings. The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chap- ter 14.5.7, "Measuring the Spectrum Emission...
Page 251 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement ● Sweep List......................251 ● Multi-SEM (Sub Block) Settings ................256 ● Reference Range....................258 ● Power Classes...................... 259 ● Settings......................260 ● Standard Files....................... 263 ● List Evaluation (Results Configuration)..............265 7.6.5.1 Sweep List Access: "Overview"...
Page 252 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Level........................253 RF Att Mode........................ 253 Attenuation......................253 Preamp........................254 Transducer Factor....................... 254 Limit Check <n>......................254 Abs Limit Start / Stop <n>................... 254 Rel Limit Start / Stop <n>.................... 254 Multi-Limit Calc <n>....................
Page 253 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Sets the resolution bandwidth for this range. For details on the RBW, see Chapter 8.5.1.1, "Separating Signals by Selecting an Appropriate Resolution Bandwidth", on page 460. Remote command: on page 922 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:BANDwidth:RESolution Sets the video bandwidth for this range.
Page 254 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Remote command: on page 925 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:INPut:ATTenuation Preamp Switches the preamplifier on or off. For details on the preamplifier, see "Preamplifier" on page 455. Remote command: on page 926 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:INPut:GAIN:STATe Transducer Factor Sets a transducer for the specified range.
Page 255 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement If the function is set to "Max", you can define a relative and an absolute limit level. In this case, the maximum of the two values is used as the limit level. For more information, see "Relative limit line functions"...
Page 256 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Insert before Range / Insert after Range Inserts a new range to the left (before) or to the right (after) of the range in which the cursor is currently displayed. The range numbers of the currently focused range and all higher ranges are increased accordingly.
Page 257 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Sub Block Count......................257 Sub Block / Center Freq....................257 Standard / MSR Settings.....................257 Edit Sweep List......................257 Sub Block Count Defines the number of sub blocks. By default, the familiar SEM measurement with just one single block of ranges is configured.
Page 258 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement 7.6.5.3 Reference Range Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Spectrum Emission Mask" > "Refer- ence Range" The range around the center frequency is defined as the reference range for all other ranges in the sweep list.
Page 259 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Tx Bandwidth ← Channel Power Settings Defines the bandwidth used for measuring the channel power, with: Minimum span ≤ "Tx Bandwidth" ≤ of reference range Remote command: on page 936 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:BWID RRC Filter State ←...
Page 260 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Used Power Classes: Defines which power classes are considered for the SEM measurement. Limits can be defined only for used power classes. It is only possible to select either one specific power class or all the defined power classes.
Page 261 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Multi-standard radio (MSR) measurements allow you to perform SEM tests on multiple carriers using different digital standards. For details, see Chapter 7.6.4.4, "Multi-Standard Radio (MSR) SEM Measurements", on page 246. Band Category......................
Page 262 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Base Station Class Defines the class of the base station according to its sending range. This setting is required to calculate the SEM limits according to standard 3GPP 37.141 V12.2.0. Remote command: on page 944 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:CLASs...
Page 263 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Power Gsm Carrier Defines the power of the GSM carrier (if available, see "Carrier Adjacent to RF Band- width Edge" on page 262). Possible values are from 0 dBm to 100 dBm in 1 dB steps. This setting is only available for Band Category2.
Page 264 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Standard files for sub blocks (Multi-SEM measurements) If more than one sub blocks are defined, the "Standard Files" tab and softkey are not available. To load a standard file for an individual sub block, use the Standard / MSR Settings setting in the "Sub Blocks"...
Page 265 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Remote command: not supported Save Standard Saves the current measurement settings for a specific standard as a file with the defined name. Remote command: on page 919 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:PRESet:STORe Delete Standard Deletes the selected standard.
Page 266 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement List Evaluation State (Result Summary)..............266 Show Peaks........................ 266 Margin......................... 266 Saving the Result Summary (Evaluation List) to a File..........267 List Evaluation State (Result Summary) Activates or deactivates the Result Summary. Remote command: on page 948 CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PEAKsearch:AUTO...
Page 267: How To Perform A Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement
® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Saving the Result Summary (Evaluation List) to a File Exports the Result Summary of the SEM measurement to an ASCII file for evaluation in an external application. If necessary, change the decimal separator for evaluation in other languages.
Page 268 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement 2. Split the frequency span of the measurement into ranges for signal parts with simi- lar characteristics. Starting from the center frequency, determine which sections of the signal to the left and right can be swept and monitored using the same parameters.
Page 269 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement ment. You only have to activate the mode for one range, the others are adapted automatically. 8. If necessary, change the settings for the reference power to which all SEM results refer in the "Reference Range"...
Page 270 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement 4. For each sub block, define the center frequency, that is, the frequency of the TX carrier or a frequency in the dedicated reference range. 5. For each sub block, do one of the following: ●...
Page 271 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement 2. In the "Standard Files" tab of the "Spectrum Emission Mask" dialog box, define a filename and storage location for the settings file. 3. Select the "Save" button. The settings are stored to a file with the extension .xml as specified. How to delete an SEM settings file 1.
Page 272: Measurement Example: Multi-Sem Measurement
® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement 7.6.7 Measurement Example: Multi-SEM Measurement The following measurement example demonstrates an SEM measurement for a signal with multiple sub blocks. A programming example demonstrating a SEM measurement in a remote environment is provided in Chapter 14.5.7.11, "Example: SEM Measurement",...
Page 273: Reference: Sem File Descriptions
® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement 8. For "Sub Block B", define the settings for the EUTRA/LTE signal: ● Set the "Center Frequency" to 906.5 MHz ● Select "MSR Settings". ● Set the "Base Station RF Bandwidth" to 5 MHz. ●...
Page 274 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement only interpret XML files of a known structure. For sample files, see the C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\sem_std direc- tory of the R&S FSW. To load a settings file, use the "Load" function in the "Standard Files" tab of the "Spec- trum Emission Mask"...
Page 275 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement ber of ranges is 30. Note that the R&S FSW uses the same ranges in each power class. Therefore, the contents of the ranges of each defined power class have to be identical to the first power class.
Page 276 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement … </PowerClass> ● The "Range" element is structured as follows: – <Range Index="n"> <Name="Name"> <ChannelType>"Channel Type"</Channel Type> <WeightingFilter> <Type>"FilterType"</Type> <RollOffFactor>"Factor"</RollOffFactor> <Bandwith>"Bandwidth"</Bandwidth> </WeightingFilter> <FrequencyRange> <Start>"RangeStart"</Start> <Stop>"RangeStop"</Stop> </FrequencyRange> <Limit> <Start Unit="Unit" Value="Value"/> <Stop Unit="Unit"...
Page 277 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Child Node Attribute Value Parameter Description Mand. Reference- Power Method TX Channel Power | TX Channel Peak Power Reference- <string> Channel Table 7-15: Attributes and child nodes of the PowerClass element Child Node Attribute Value...
Page 278 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Child node Attribute Value Parameter description Mand. Type RRC | CFilter Type of the weighting filter Roll Off Factor 0…1 Excess bandwidth of the fil- Only if the filter type is RRC Bandwidth <bandwidth in Hz>...
Page 279 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement Child node Attribute Value Parameter description Mand. RFAttenuation Mode Manual | Auto "RF Att Mode" on page 253 Yes, if the Refer- enceLevel child node is used Preamplifier ON | OFF | 1 | 0 "Preamp"...
Page 280: Spurious Emissions Measurement
® Measurements and Results R&S Spurious Emissions Measurement File contents Explanation Reference range settings RefType; CPOWER; Reference power type TxBandwidth;3840000;;Hz Channel power settings Filter State; ON; Alpha;0.22; PeaksPerRange;1; Max. number of peaks per range to be detected Values;2; Number of detected peaks File data section 0;-12750000;-2515000;30000;13242367500;-43.844 Measured peak values:...
Page 281: Spurious Emissions Measurement Results
® Measurements and Results R&S Spurious Emissions Measurement 7.7.2 Spurious Emissions Measurement Results The measured signal, including any spurious emissions, and optionally the detected peaks are displayed in the Spurious Emissions measurement diagram. If defined, the limit lines and the limit check results are also indicated. In addition to the graphical results, a result table can be displayed to evaluate the measured powers and limit check results (see also Chapter 7.7.3.2, "Limit Lines in Spurious...
Page 282: Spurious Emissions Basics
® Measurements and Results R&S Spurious Emissions Measurement ● Display detected peaks as blue squares in the diagram, as well as in the peak list Furthermore, you can save the evaluation list to a file. Retrieving Results via Remote Control The measured spurious values of the displayed trace can be retrieved using the TRAC:DATA? SPUR command (see on page 1143).
Page 283 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spurious Emissions Measurement Defining ranges by remote control In Spurious Emissions measurements, there are no remote commands to insert new ranges between existing ranges directly. However, you can delete or redefine the exist- ing ranges to create the required order. A remote command example for defining parameters and ranges in Spurious Emis- sions measurements is described in Chapter 14.5.8.7, "Programming Example: Spuri-...
Page 284: Spurious Emissions Measurement Configuration
® Measurements and Results R&S Spurious Emissions Measurement The limit check is considered to be "' failed!" if any signal level outside the absolute lim- its is measured. If the limit check is activated, the limit line values for each range are displayed in the evaluation list.
Page 285 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spurious Emissions Measurement Range Start / Range Stop................... 285 Filter Type........................286 RBW..........................286 VBW..........................286 Sweep Time Mode...................... 286 Sweep Time........................ 286 Detector........................286 Reference Level......................287 RF Attenuation Mode....................287 Attenuation......................287 Preamp........................287 Sweep Points......................287 Stop After Sweep......................
Page 286: Filter Type
® Measurements and Results R&S Spurious Emissions Measurement Remote command: on page 924 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>[:FREQuency]:STARt on page 925 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>[:FREQuency]:STOP Filter Type Sets the filter type for this range. For details on filter types, see Chapter 8.5.1.6, "Which Data May Pass: Filter Types", on page 463.
Page 287: Reference Level
® Measurements and Results R&S Spurious Emissions Measurement Reference Level Sets the reference level for the range. For details on the reference level, see Chapter 8.4.1.1, "Reference Level", on page 449. Remote command: on page 960 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:RLEVel RF Attenuation Mode Activates or deactivates the auto mode for RF attenuation.
Page 288: Limit Check
® Measurements and Results R&S Spurious Emissions Measurement ● The unit is dB. For details on transducers, see Chapter 12.3.1, "Basics on Transducer Factors", on page 675. Remote command: on page 961 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:TRANsducer Limit Check Activates or deactivates the limit check for all ranges. For details on limit checks, see Chapter 7.7.3.2, "Limit Lines in Spurious Measure- ments",...
Page 289 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spurious Emissions Measurement Configure the contents and display of the result list. List Evaluation State....................289 Show Peaks........................ 289 Margin......................... 289 Details......................... 290 Peaks per Range......................290 Save Evaluation List....................290 List Evaluation State Activates or deactivates the list evaluation. Remote command: on page 1143 TRACe<n>[:DATA]...
Page 290: How To Perform A Spurious Emissions Measurement
® Measurements and Results R&S Spurious Emissions Measurement Details Configures how detailed the list in the Result Summary is. Includes all detected peaks (up to a maximum defined by "Peaks per Range"). Includes only one peak per range. Remote command: on page 962 CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PEAKsearch:DETails Peaks per Range...
Page 291 ® Measurements and Results R&S Spurious Emissions Measurement 5. Define the measurement parameters for each range as required. 6. Optionally, define a limit check. a) Activate the limit check by setting "Limit Check" to "ABSOLUTE". The limit check is always activated or deactivated for all ranges simultaneously. b) Define the limit line's start and stop values for each range of the signal.
Page 292: Reference: Ascii Export File Format (Spurious)
® Measurements and Results R&S Spurious Emissions Measurement 7.7.6 Reference: ASCII Export File Format (Spurious) The file has a header containing important parameters for scaling, several data sec- tions containing the sweep settings per range, and a data section containing the peak list.
Page 293: Statistical Measurements (Apd, Ccdf)
® Measurements and Results R&S Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF) File contents Explanation File data section 0;9000;150000;1000;79500;-25.006643295288086;- Measured peak values: 12.006643295288086;PASS; <range number>; 0;9000;150000;1000;101022.11126961483;-47.075 <start frequency>; 111389160156;-34.075111389160156;PASS; <stop frequency>; 0;9000;150000;1000;58380.171184022824;-47.079 <resolution bandwidth of range>; 341888427734;-34.079341888427734;PASS; <frequency of peak>; <absolute power in dBm of peak>; <distance to the limit line in dB>;...
Page 294: Typical Applications
® Measurements and Results R&S Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF) Statistic measurements on pulsed signals can be performed using a gated trigger. For details see Chapter 7.8.4, "APD and CCDF Basics - Gated Triggering", on page 296. 7.8.2 Typical Applications Digital modulated signals are similar to white noise within the transmit channel, but are different in their amplitude distribution.
Page 295 ® Measurements and Results R&S Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF) In addition to the histogram, a result table is displayed containing the following informa- tion: ● Number of samples used for calculation ● For each displayed trace: – Mean amplitude – Peak amplitude –...
Page 296: Apd And Ccdf Basics - Gated Triggering
® Measurements and Results R&S Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF) ● For each displayed trace: Mean Mean power Peak Peak power Crest Crest factor (peak power – mean power) 10 % 10 % probability that the level exceeds mean power + [x] dB 1 % probability that the level exceeds mean power + [x] dB 0,1 % 0,1 % probability that the level exceeds mean power + [x] dB...
Page 297: Apd And Ccdf Configuration
® Measurements and Results R&S Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF) 7.8.5 APD and CCDF Configuration Configuration consists of the following settings: ● Make sure the specified reference level is higher than the measured peak value (see "Reference Level" on page 452). ●...
Page 298 ® Measurements and Results R&S Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF) The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chap- ter 14.5.9, "Analyzing Statistics (APD, CCDF)", on page 967. Both dialog boxes are identical except for the "Percent Marker" setting, which is only available for CCDF measurements.
Page 299 ® Measurements and Results R&S Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF) For statistics measurements with the R&S FSW, the number of samples to be mea- sured is defined instead of the sweep time. Since only statistically independent sam- ples contribute to statistics, the sweep or measurement time is calculated automatically and displayed in the channel bar ("Meas Time").
Page 300 ® Measurements and Results R&S Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF) Up to three ranges can be defined for each of the six available traces. Comment........................300 Period..........................300 Range <x> Use......................300 Range <x> Start/Stop....................300 Comment An optional comment can be defined for the gate range settings of each trace. Remote command: on page 969 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<t>:COMMent...
Page 301 ® Measurements and Results R&S Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF) Note: You can define the time values with a greater numerical resolution than is dis- played; the values are only rounded for display. Remote command: on page 970 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<t>:STARt<gr> on page 970 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<t>:STOP<gr>...
Page 302 ® Measurements and Results R&S Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF) X-Axis Defines the scaling settings for signal level values. Ref Level ← X-Axis Defines the reference level for the signal levels in the currently active unit (dBm, dBµV, etc.). For the APD function this value corresponds to the right diagram border. For the CCDF function there is no direct representation of this value on the diagram as the x-axis is scaled relatively to the measured mean power.
Page 303: How To Perform An Apd Or Ccdf Measurement
® Measurements and Results R&S Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF) X-axis ref level: -10 dBm X-axis range APD: 100 dB X-axis range CCDF: 20 dB Y-axis upper limit: Y-axis lower limit: 1E-6 Remote command: on page 971 CALCulate<n>:STATistics:PRESet Adjust Settings Adjusts the level settings according to the measured difference between peak and min- imum power for APD measurement or peak and mean power for CCDF measurement in order to obtain maximum power resolution.
Page 304: Examples
® Measurements and Results R&S Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF) 4. For each active trace, define up to three ranges within the time period to be mea- sured. In the example covering 3 pulses, you could define one range for each pulse.
Page 305 ® Measurements and Results R&S Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF) t5: End of burst (after 602 µs) The instrument has to be configured as follows: Trigger Offset t2 – t1 = 25 µs now the gate ranges are relative to t2 Range1 Start t3 –...
Page 306 ® Measurements and Results R&S Statistical Measurements (APD, CCDF) Figure 7-50: Amplitude probability distribution of white noise 4. Now select the "CCDF" measurement function from the "Select Measurement" dia- log box. Figure 7-51: CCDF of white noise User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 43...
Page 307: Optimizing And Troubleshooting The Measurement
® Measurements and Results R&S Time Domain Power Measurement The CCDF trace indicates the probability that a level will exceed the mean power. The level above the mean power is plotted along the x-axis of the graph. The origin of the axis corresponds to the mean power level. The probability that a level will be exceeded is plotted along the y-axis.
Page 308: Time Domain Power Basics - Range Definition Using Limit Lines
® Measurements and Results R&S Time Domain Power Measurement Mode Description Peak Peak value from the points of the displayed trace or a segment thereof. RMS value from the points of the displayed trace or a segment thereof. Mean Mean value from the points of the displayed trace or a segment thereof.
Page 309: Time Domain Power Configuration
® Measurements and Results R&S Time Domain Power Measurement between signal and noise power of a TDMA signal for instance can be measured by using a measurement as a reference value and then varying the measurement range. In order to get stable measurement results for a limited evaluation range, usually a trig- ger is required.
Page 310: How To Measure Powers In The Time Domain
® Measurements and Results R&S Time Domain Power Measurement Results Activates the power results to be evaluated from the displayed trace or a limited area of the trace. "Peak" Peak power over several measurements (uses trace averaging, Max Hold) "RMS" RMS value from the points of the displayed trace or a segment thereof.
Page 311: Measurement Example
® Measurements and Results R&S Time Domain Power Measurement To measure the power in the time domain 1. Select the [MEAS] key. 2. From the "Select Measurement" dialog box, select the "Time Domain Power" mea- surement function. 3. Select the type of power measurement results to be determined by selecting the corresponding softkeys.
Page 312: Harmonic Distortion Measurement
® Measurements and Results R&S Harmonic Distortion Measurement μ s. 6. Define a trigger offset of -50 7. Select the "Time Domain Power" measurement function from the "Select Measure- ment" dialog box. 8. In the Time Domain Power configuration dialog box, set all four results to "On". 9.
Page 313: Harmonic Distortion Basics
® Measurements and Results R&S Harmonic Distortion Measurement range. The center frequency is set to this frequency and the reference level is adjusted accordingly. For measurements in zero span, the center frequency remains unchanged. The Harmonic Distortion measurement then performs zero span sweeps at the center frequency and at each harmonic, i.e.
Page 314 ® Measurements and Results R&S Harmonic Distortion Measurement Figure 7-52: Extrapolation of the 1st and 2nd harmonics to the 2nd harmonic intercept at 40 dBm The following formula for the obtainable harmonic distortion d in dB is derived from the straight-line equations and the given intercept point: = S.H.I –...
Page 315: Harmonic Distortion Results
® Measurements and Results R&S Harmonic Distortion Measurement The maximum harmonic distortion is obtained if the level of the harmonic equals the intrinsic noise level of the receiver. The level applied to the mixer, according to (2), is: At a resolution bandwidth of 10 Hz (noise level -143 dBm, S.H.I. = 40 dBm), the opti- mum mixer level is –...
Page 316: Harmonic Distortion Configuration
® Measurements and Results R&S Harmonic Distortion Measurement In addition, a result table is displayed providing the following information: ● First harmonic frequency ● THD (total harmonic distortion), relative and absolute values ● For each detected harmonic: – Frequency – –...
Page 317 ® Measurements and Results R&S Harmonic Distortion Measurement The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chap- ter 14.5.11, "Measuring the Harmonic Distortion", on page 987. Number of Harmonics....................317 Harmonic Sweep Time....................317 Harmonic RBW Auto....................317 Adjust Settings......................
Page 318: How To Determine The Harmonic Distortion
® Measurements and Results R&S Third Order Intercept (TOI) Measurement If harmonic measurement was performed in the time domain, this function adjusts the reference level only. Remote command: on page 988 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:PRESet 7.10.5 How to Determine the Harmonic Distortion Chapter 9.3.6, "Measurement Example: Measuring Harmonics Using Marker Func- tions", on page 555, measuring harmonics was described using marker functions.
Page 319: About The Toi Measurement
® Measurements and Results R&S Third Order Intercept (TOI) Measurement 7.11.1 About the TOI Measurement If several signals are applied to a transmission two-port device with nonlinear charac- teristic, intermodulation products appear at its output at the sums and differences of the signals.
Page 320 ® Measurements and Results R&S Third Order Intercept (TOI) Measurement Figure 7-53: Intermodulation products Ps1 and Ps2 The intermodulation product at f is generated by mixing the 2nd harmonic of useful signal P and signal P Tthe intermodulation product at f is generated by mixing the 2nd harmonic of useful signal P and signal P...
Page 321 ® Measurements and Results R&S Third Order Intercept (TOI) Measurement Figure 7-54: Dependency of intermodulation products on level of useful signals The useful signals at the two-port output increase proportionally with the input level as long as the two-port is in the linear range. A level change of 1 dB at the input causes a level change of 1 dB at the output.
Page 322 ® Measurements and Results R&S Third Order Intercept (TOI) Measurement Intermodulation-free dynamic range The "Intermodulation-free dynamic range", i.e. the level range in which no internal intermodulation products are generated if two-tone signals are measured, is deter- mined by the third order intercept point, the phase noise and the thermal noise of the signal analyzer.
Page 323: Toi Results
® Measurements and Results R&S Third Order Intercept (TOI) Measurement Figure 7-56: Intermodulation-free dynamic range as a function of level at the input mixer and of the selected resolution bandwidth (Useful signal offset = 10 to 100 kHz, DANL = -145 dBm/Hz, TOI = 15 dBm; typical val- ues at 2 GHz).
Page 324: Toi Configuration
® Measurements and Results R&S Third Order Intercept (TOI) Measurement Remote command The TOI can also be queried using the remote command CALCulate<n>: on page 992. MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI:RESult? 7.11.4 TOI Configuration Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "Third Order Intercept" > "TOI Config" The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chap- ter 14.5.12, "Measuring the Third Order Intercept...
Page 325: How To Determine The Third Order Intercept
® Measurements and Results R&S Third Order Intercept (TOI) Measurement The marker positions can be edited; the TOI is then recalculated according to the new marker values. To reset all marker positions automatically, use the Search Signals function. Remote command: on page 1156 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X on page 1154...
Page 326 ® Measurements and Results R&S Third Order Intercept (TOI) Measurement Test setup: Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMW): Device Level Frequency Signal generator 1 -4 dBm 799.6 MHz Signal generator 2 -4 dBm 800.4 MHz Setting up the measurement 1. Preset the R&S FSW. 2.
Page 327 ® Measurements and Results R&S Third Order Intercept (TOI) Measurement The third order intercept (TOI) is displayed in the marker information. 2. The level of a signal analyzer's intrinsic intermodulation products depends on the RF level of the useful signals at the input mixer. When the RF attenuation is added, the mixer level is reduced and the intermodulation distance is increased.
Page 328: Am Modulation Depth Measurement
® Measurements and Results R&S AM Modulation Depth Measurement 7.12 AM Modulation Depth Measurement This measurement determines the AM modulation depth of an AM-modulated carrier. ● About the Measurement..................328 ● AM Modulation Depth Results................328 ● AM Modulation Depth Configuration..............329 ●...
Page 329: Am Modulation Depth Configuration
® Measurements and Results R&S AM Modulation Depth Measurement Remote command: The AM modulation depth can also be queried using the remote command on page 994. CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth:RESult<t>? 7.12.3 AM Modulation Depth Configuration Access: "Overview" > "Select Measurement" > "AM Modulation Depth" > "AM Mod Depth Config"...
Page 330: Optimizing And Troubleshooting The Measurement
® Measurements and Results R&S AM Modulation Depth Measurement Marker Description Maximum of the signal (= carrier level) Offset of next peak to the right of the carrier Offset of the next peak to the left of the carrier The marker positions can be edited; the modulation depth is then recalculated accord- ing to the new marker values.
Page 331: How To Determine The Am Modulation Depth
® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement 7.12.5 How to Determine the AM Modulation Depth The following step-by-step instructions demonstrate how to determine the AM modula- tion depth. For remote operation, see Chapter 14.5.13.2, "Example: Measuring the AM Modulation Depth", on page 994.
Page 332: About The Emi Measurement
® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement 7.13.1 About the EMI Measurement EMI measurements can be very time-consuming, especially if weighting detectors are required for the measurement. In addition, EMC testing often requires various proce- dures to locate local EMI maxima. Such procedures are, for example, movements of an absorbing clamp, variations in the height of the test antenna or the rotation of the DUT.
Page 333: Emi Measurement Basics
® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement Initial peak search results - Marker Table As a result of the initial peak search, the active markers are set to the positive peaks of the measured signal. If Auto peak search and limit lines are active, the active markers are set to the peak delta values between the measured signal and the limit lines.
Page 334 ® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement ● Initial Measurement - Peak Search............... 340 ● Final Measurement at the Marker Position............341 ● Limit Checks......................341 7.13.3.1 Resolution Bandwidth and Filter Types EMI testing requires resolution filters with a 6 dB bandwidth. The R&S FSW EMI mea- surement adds the following bandwidths that comply to commercial and military stand- ards to those already available with the base unit: Commercial (CISPR, FFC etc.)
Page 335 ® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement Each detector needs a different period of time to fully charge and discharge; the indi- vidual requirements on the dwell time are described for each detector. For details on defining the dwell time for an R&S FSW EMI measurement see "Defining a Dwell Time for the Final Measurement"...
Page 336 ® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement The filter bandwidth and time parameters of the detector depend on the measured fre- quency. The time lag of the simulated pointer instrument reflects the weighting factor of the signal depending on its form, modulation, etc. Table 7-17: Required parameters depending on frequency for CISPR quasipeak detector Band A Band B...
Page 337 ® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement Consider the following when defining the dwell time: ● Unknown signals: select a dwell time of at least 1 second to ensure that pulses down to a frequency of 5 Hz are weighted correctly ●...
Page 338 ® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement 7.13.3.3 Frequency Resolution - Sweep Points and Scaling The number of sweep points defines the number of measurement values collected dur- ing one sweep. Thus, increasing the sweep points also increases the accuracy of the results regarding the frequency resolution.
Page 339 ® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement 7.13.3.4 Controlling V-Networks (LISN) For measurements on power lines, the R&S FSW EMI measurement adds functionality to control a line impedance stabilization network (LISN) directly. Thus you can deter- mine the interference caused by power supplies and cables. You can connect the LISN to the user port of the R&S FSW.
Page 340 ® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement 7.13.3.6 Initial Measurement - Peak Search The purpose of an initial peak search is to find signals with a high interference level quickly. The peak search is performed with a fast detector like the peak or average detector.
Page 341 ® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement Example: ● In the initial measurement, determine the peak on one trace using the average detector by assigning a marker to that trace. For the marker frequency, perform a refined measurement using the CISPR or RMS average detector. ●...
Page 342: Emi Measurement Configuration
® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement When using limit lines in combination with EMI measurements, the marker levels from the initial measurement are compared to the limit line values. The result of the limit line check is displayed in the diagram as usual. In the EMI Result Summary, the limit check is based on the results of the final test.
Page 343: Selected Marker
® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement Selected Marker......................343 Marker State........................343 Marker Position X-value....................343 Marker Type........................ 344 Reference Marker....................... 344 Linking to Another Marker................... 344 Assigning the Marker to a Trace................. 344 Final Test Detector...................... 345 Select Marker......................
Page 344: Marker Type
® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement Marker Type Toggles the marker type. The type for marker 1 is always "Normal", the type for delta marker 1 is always "Delta". These types cannot be changed. Note: If normal marker 1 is the active marker, switching the "Mkr Type" activates an additional delta marker 1.
Page 345: Final Test Detector
® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement Remote command: on page 1156 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:TRACe Final Test Detector Defines the detector to be used for the final EMI test at the marker frequency. This setting is only available if the EMI (R&S FSW-K54) measurement option is instal- led.
Page 346 ® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement Remote command: on page 1155 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe] on page 1153 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe] 7.13.4.2 EMI Final Measurement Configuration The final EMI measurement can be performed with different settings than the initial peak search. These settings are described here. User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─...
Page 347 ® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement The detector to be used for the final EMI test can be defined differently for each fre- quency, thus the detector is configured in the EMI marker settings, see "Final Test Detector"...
Page 348 ® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement Remote command: on page 1031 [SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution] on page 1031 [SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:AUTO Automatic Peak Search If activated, a peak search is performed automatically for all active markers after each sweep. If Auto peak search and limit lines are active, the active markers are set to the peak delta values between the measured signal and the limit lines.
Page 349 ® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement For more information see Chapter 7.13.3.1, "Resolution Bandwidth and Filter Types", on page 334. Remote command: Filter type: on page 1032 [SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:TYPE Filter bandwidth: on page 1031 [SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution] 7.13.4.3 LISN Control Settings Access: [MEAS CONFIG] >...
Page 350: Emi Result Analysis
® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement Phase Selects the phase to be measured. Phase N and L1 are included in all four LISN. Phase L2 and L3 are only included in four-line networks. You can select one phase only for each measurement. Remote command: on page 998 INPut<ip>:LISN:PHASe...
Page 351 ® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement For remote operation, see Chapter 14.5.14.8, "Programming Example: EMI Measure- ment", on page 1002. 1. Press the [MODE] key on the front panel and select the "Spectrum" application. 2. Define the frequency range of the EMI measurement. a) Press the [FREQ] key and then the "Frequency Config"...
Page 352 ® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement Demodulation begins immediately with the next measurement. During the initial measurement, demodulation is performed for the entire measurement span; during the final measurement only the detected peak marker positions are demodulated (for the defined dwell time).
Page 353: Measurement Example: Measuring Radio Frequency Interference
® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement 7.13.7 Measurement Example: Measuring Radio Frequency Interference A common measurement task that you can do with the R&S FSW EMI measurement is to detect radio frequency interference (RFI) or electromagnetic interferences (EMI). The measurement shows signal levels over a particular frequency range.
Page 354 ® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement 8. Configure the traces for the initial EMI measurement. a) Press the [TRACE] key. b) Press the "Trace Config" softkey to configure two traces. c) Define the detectors to use for the initial measurement. Select the peak detec- tor for trace 1 and the average detector for trace 2.
Page 355: Optimizing And Troubleshooting Emi Measurements
® Measurements and Results R&S Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Measurement Evaluating the measurement Check the Result Summary to detect exceeded limit values. Zoom into the diagram at the conspicuous frequency for more details. If necessary, decrease the span to the area in which irregular values occurred and repeat the measurement.
Page 356: Common Measurement Settings
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Configuration Overview 8 Common Measurement Settings Basic measurement settings that are common to many measurement tasks, regardless of the application or operating mode, are described here. If you are performing a spe- cific measurement task, using an operating mode other than Signal and Spectrum Ana- lyzer mode, or an application other than the Spectrum application, be sure to check the specific application or mode description for settings that may deviate from these com- mon settings.
Page 357 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Configuration Overview 1. "Select Measurement" Chapter 7, "Measurements and Results", on page 131 2. Input Chapter 8.2.2, "Input Source Settings", on page 366 3. Amplitude Chapter 8.4, "Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration", on page 448 4.
Page 358: Data Input And Output
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output 8.2 Data Input and Output The R&S FSW can analyze signals from different input sources and provide various types of output (such as video or trigger signals). ● Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output..........
Page 359 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Active probes When using active probes from the R&S RT family, consider the following: ● Active probes require operating power from the instrument and have a proprietary interface to the instrument. ●...
Page 360 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output A fixed impedance of 50 Ω is used for all probes to convert voltage values to power levels. Additional information An application note discussing differential measurements with spectrum analyzers is available from the Rohde & Schwarz website: 1EF84: Differential measurements with Spectrum Analyzers and Probes Common Mode Offset (for Differential Probes) ®...
Page 361 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Clipping effects due to incorrect common mode offset ® The R&S RT-ZD10/20/30 probe measures only differential input signals. Common mode signals are suppressed by the probe. Therefore, the common mode offset com- pensation is not directly visible in the result display.
Page 362 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output 3. Connect the probe to the adapter. Probes are automatically detected when you plug them into the R&S FSW. The detected information on the probe is displayed in the "Probes" tab of the "Input" dialog box.
Page 363 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output ● CM-Mode: Common mode input voltage (V Mean voltage between the positive and negative input terminal vs. ground The R&S FSW supports all probe modes. The mode is configured in the Chap- ter 8.2.2.2, "Probe Settings",...
Page 364 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output other connected devices. Using the same trigger on several devices is useful to syn- chronize the transmitted and received signals within a measurement. For details on the connectors see the R&S FSW "Getting Started" manual. External trigger as input If the trigger signal for the R&S FSW is provided by an external device, the trigger sig- nal source must be connected to the R&S FSW and the trigger source must be defined...
Page 365 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output The video output is a signal of 1 V. It can be used, for example, to control demodula- ted audio frequencies. The IF output is a signal of the measured level at a specified frequency. The "2ND IF"...
Page 366: Input Source Settings
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output bandwidth of 2 GHz. The IF output can then be analyzed by a different instrument, for example an R&S®RTO oscilloscope. For instrument model R&S FSW85, the IF output can also be provided at the optional "IF OUT 2 GHz"...
Page 367 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output The default input source for the R&S FSW is "Radio Frequency", i.e. the signal at the "RF Input" connector of the R&S FSW. If no additional options are installed, this is the only available input source.
Page 368: Radio Frequency State
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Radio Frequency State....................368 Input Coupling......................368 Impedance........................368 Direct Path........................369 High Pass Filter 1 to 3 GHz..................369 YIG-Preselector......................369 Preselector Adjust....................... 370 Input Connector......................370 Radio Frequency State Activates input from the "RF Input" connector. For R&S FSW85 models with two input connectors, you must define which input source is used for each measurement channel.
Page 369: Direct Path
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output The impedance conversion does not affect the level of the output signals (such as IF, video, demod, digital I/Q output) "50Ω" (Default:) no conversion takes place The 50 Ω input impedance is transformed to a higher impedance "75Ω"...
Page 370: Preselector Adjust
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output An internal YIG-preselector at the input of the R&S FSW ensures that image frequen- cies are rejected. However, this is only possible for a restricted bandwidth. To use the maximum bandwidth for signal analysis you can disable the YIG-preselector at the input of the R&S FSW, which can lead to image-frequency display.
Page 371 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Remote command: on page 1068 INPut<ip>:CONNector 8.2.2.2 Probe Settings Access: [INPUT / OUTPUT] > "Input Source Config" > "Probes" Data input for the measurement can be provided by probes if the optional Analog Baseband Interface (R&S FSW-B71) is available or the R&S RT-ZA9 adapter is used.
Page 372 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Serial Number Serial number of the probe Remote command: on page 1090 [SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:ID:SRNumber? Part Number Rohde & Schwarz part number Remote command: on page 1089 [SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:ID:PARTnumber? Type Type of probe: ● Single-ended ●...
Page 373: Power Sensors
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output "2:1" Attenuation by 6 dB Remote command: on page 1090 [SENSe:]PROBe<pb>:SETup:ATTRatio Microbutton Action Active Rohde & Schwarz probes (except for R&S RT-ZS10E) have a configurable microbutton on the probe head. By pressing this button, you can perform an action on the instrument directly from the probe.
Page 374 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Using the power sensor with several applications The power sensor cannot be used from the R&S FSW firmware and the R&S Power Viewer Plus (virtual power meter for displaying results of the R&S NRP power sensors) simultaneously.
Page 375 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output 8.2.3.2 Power Sensor Settings Access: "Overview" > "Input" > "Power Sensor" tab Each sensor is configured on a separate tab. State..........................376 Continuous Value Update................... 376 Select.......................... 376 Zeroing Power Sensor....................376 Frequency Manual......................
Page 376: State
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output State Switches the power measurement for all power sensors on or off. Note that in addition to this general setting, each power sensor can be activated or deactivated individually by the Select setting on each tab.
Page 377: Frequency Manual
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Frequency Manual Defines the frequency of the signal to be measured. The power sensor has a memory with frequency-dependent correction factors. This allows extreme accuracy for signals of a known frequency. Remote command: on page 1112 [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:FREQuency...
Page 378: Use Ref Level Offset
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Remote command: on page 1110 CALCulate<n>:PMETer<p>:RELative[:MAGNitude] Use Ref Level Offset If activated, takes the reference level offset defined for the analyzer into account for the measured power (see "Shifting the Display (Offset)" on page 453).
Page 379 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Remote command: on page 1117 [SENSe:]PMETer<p>:TRIGger:LEVel Hysteresis ← Using the power sensor as an external trigger Defines the distance in dB to the trigger level that the trigger source must exceed before a trigger event occurs.
Page 380 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output ● Select "Input" from the "Overview". ● Select the [INPUT/OUTPUT] key and then the "Power Sensor Config" softkey. 2. Select the tab for the power sensor index you want to configure, e.g. "Power Sen- sor 1".
Page 381: Optional External Generator Control
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output How to Zero the Power Sensor 1. To display the "Power Sensor" tab of the "Input" dialog box, do one of the following: ● Select "Input" from the "Overview". ● Select the [INPUT/OUTPUT] key and then the "Power Sensor Config" softkey. 2.
Page 382 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output ● About External Generator Control.................382 ● Basics on External Generator Control..............382 ● External Generator Control Settings..............393 ● How to Work With External Generator Control............. 401 ● Measurement Example: Calibration with an External Generator......
Page 383 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output TTL synchronization In addition, TTL synchronization can be used with some Rohde & Schwarz generators connected via GPIB. The TTL interface is included in the AUX control connector of the External Generator Control option. Using the TTL interface allows for considerably higher measurement rates than pure GPIB control, because the frequency stepping of the R&S FSW is directly coupled with the frequency stepping of the generator.
Page 384 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output can be carried out to compensate for the effects of the test setup (e.g. frequency response of connecting cables). Figure 8-6: Test setup for transmission measurement Reflection Measurement Scalar reflection measurements can be carried out using a reflection-coefficient mea- surement bridge.
Page 385 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Overview of Supported Generators Generator Model Driver file TTL sup- Generator type Model Driver file TTL sup- type port port SGS100A 6 GHz SGS100A6 3 GHz SMJ03 12 GHz SGS100A12 6 GHz SMJ06 SGT100A 3 GHz...
Page 386 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Generator Model Driver file TTL sup- Generator type Model Driver file TTL sup- type port port 6 GHz SME06 4 GHz SMU04 SMF100A 43.5 GHz SMF100A 4 GHz SMU04B31 22 GHz SMF22 6 GHz SMU06...
Page 387 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Calibration Mechanism A common measurement setup includes a signal generator, a device under test (DUT), and a signal and spectrum analyzer. Therefore, it is useful to measure the attenuation or gain caused by the cables and connectors from the signal generator and the signal analyzer in advance.
Page 388 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output This is the case if one or more of the following values deviate from the calibration set- tings: ● Coupling (RBW, VBW, SWT) ● Reference level, RF attenuation ● Start or stop frequency ●...
Page 389 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Note that the normalized measurement data is stored, not the original reference trace! Thus, if you store the normalized trace directly after calibration, without changing any settings, the transducer factor will be 0 dB for the entire span (by definition of the nor- malized trace).
Page 390 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output ● Manual coupling: a single frequency is defined ● Automatic coupling: a series of frequencies is defined (one for each sweep point), based on the current frequency at the RF input of the R&S FSW; the RF fre- quency range covers the currently defined span of the R&S FSW (unless limited by the range of the signal generator) Automatic coupling...
Page 391 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output When pure GPIB connections are used between the R&S FSW and the signal genera- tor, the R&S FSW sets the generator frequency for each frequency point individually via GPIB, and only when the setting procedure is finished, the R&S FSW can measure the next sweep point.
Page 392 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Displayed Information and Errors Channel bar If external generator control is active, some additional information is displayed in the channel bar. Label Description EXT TG: <source power> External generator active; signal sent with <source power> level Power Offset (see "Source Offset"...
Page 393 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Overloading At a reference level of -10 dBm and at an external generator output level of the same value, the R&S FSW operates without overrange reserve. That means the R&S FSW is in danger of being overloaded if a signal is applied whose amplitude is higher than the reference line.
Page 394 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output For more information on configuring interfaces, see Chapter 13.1.1, "Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols", on page 730. Generator Type......................394 Interface........................394 Handshake......................394 GPIB Address/TCPIP Address / Computer Name............394 Reference........................395 Edit Generator Setup File....................395 Frequency Min/ Frequency...
Page 395 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Remote command: on page 1100 SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:RDEVice:GENerator<gen>:ADDRess SYSTem:COMMunicate:TCPip:RDEVice:GENerator<gen>:ADDRess on page 1101 Reference Selects the internal R&S FSW or an external frequency reference to synchronize the R&S FSW with the generator (default: internal). Remote command: on page 1099 SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:ROSCillator[:SOURce]...
Page 396 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Source State....................... 396 Source Power......................396 Source Offset......................396 Source Frequency Coupling..................397 (Manual) Source Frequency..................397 (Automatic) Source Frequency (Numerator/Denominator/Offset)....... 397 Result Frequency Start....................398 Result Frequency Stop....................398 Source State Activates or deactivates control of an external generator. Remote command: on page 1098 SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>[:STATe]...
Page 397 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Using this offset, attenuators or amplifiers at the output connector of the external gen- erator can be taken into account. This is useful, for example, for the displayed output power values on screen or during data entry. Positive offsets apply to an amplifier, while negative offsets apply to an attenuator after the external generator.
Page 398 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Remote command: SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency[:FACTor]:DENominator on page 1096 on page 1097 SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency[:FACTor]:NUMerator on page 1097 SOURce<si>:EXTernal<gen>:FREQuency:OFFSet Result Frequency Start For reference only: The start frequency for the generator, calculated from the config- ured generator frequency and the start value defined for the R&S FSW. Result Frequency Stop For reference only: The stop frequency for the generator, calculated from the config- ured generator frequency and the stop value defined for the R&S FSW.
Page 399 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Save as Trd Factor......................400 Reference Position......................400 Reference Value......................400 Calibrate Transmission Starts a transmission type measurement to determine a reference trace. This trace is used to calculate the difference for the normalized values. For details, see "Calibration Mechanism"...
Page 400 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Remote command: on page 1103 [SENSe:]CORRection:RECall Save as Trd Factor Uses the normalized measurement data to generate a transducer factor. The trace data is converted to a transducer with unit dB and stored in a file with the specified name and the suffix .trd under "C:\Program Files (x86)\Rohde-Schwarz\FSW\<version>\trd".
Page 401 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<n>][:SUBWindow<w>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RVALue on page 1102 8.2.4.4 How to Work With External Generator Control The following step-by-step instructions demonstrate how to work with the optional External Generator Control. For remote operation, see "Programming Example for External Generator Control"...
Page 402 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output 13. Optionally, to define a constant level offset for the external generator, define a "Source Offset". 14. The default frequency list for the calibration sweep contains 1001 values, divided in equi-distant frequencies between the R&S FSW's start and stop frequency. For most cases, this automatic coupling should be correct.
Page 403 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output How to Remove the Effects of a Particular Component from Measurement Results Using Calibration 1. Set up the measurement, including the component, and perform a calibration as described in "How to Calibrate a Measurement Setup using an External Generator" on page 401.
Page 404 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output 8.2.4.5 Measurement Example: Calibration with an External Generator The following measurement example demonstrates the most common functions using an external generator. This example requires the External Generator Control option. The example assumes an SMW100A generator is connected to the R&S FSW. A band elimination filter is the device under test.
Page 405 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Figure 8-8: Measurement results from generator, analyzer and connecting cables 13. Select "Source Calibration Normalize": "On" to set the measurement results for the current setup to 0, thus eliminating all effects from the generator, the analyzer and the connecting cables from subsequent measurements with the band elimination filter.
Page 406 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output 2. Connect the band elimination filter output to the [RF input] connector of the R&S FSW. Figure 8-10: Band elimination filter results 3. Shift the reference line from the top of the diagram to the middle of the diagram by changing the position of the reference point 0.0 dB to 50 %.
Page 407 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Compensating the effects of additional attenuation after calibration After calibration, an additional attenuator is inserted between the DUT and the R&S FSW. This may be necessary, for example, to protect the analyzer's input connec- tor.
Page 408 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Figure 8-13: Reference line with an offset of -3 dB and shifted to middle of diagram (50%) 3. After the reference trace has been shifted, you can zoom into the measured trace to determine the offsets to the reference line, which represent the effects of the band elimination filter in the measurement setup.
Page 409: Optional External Mixers
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output 8.2.5 Optional External Mixers If the R&S FSW External Mixer option is installed, an external mixer can be connected to the R&S FSW to increase the available frequency range. In this case, the input to measure is not taken from the RF input connector, but from the [Ext Mixer] connec- tor(s).
Page 410 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output : Intermediate frequency (variable; defined internally depending on RBW and span) Thus, depending on the required frequency band, the appropriate order of harmonic must be selected. For commonly required frequency ranges, predefined bands with the appropriate harmonic order setting are provided.
Page 411 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Two-port mixer Three-port mixer In both cases, the nominal LO level is 15.5 dBm. Bias Current Single-diode mixers generally require a DC voltage which is applied via the LO line. This DC voltage is to be tuned to the minimum conversion loss versus frequency. Such a DC voltage can be set via the "BIAS"...
Page 412 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output + 10 mA is obtained for a short circuit at the output of the voltage divider. In order to use biasing it is not important to know the exact current flowing through the diode since the conversion loss must be set to a minimum with the frequency.
Page 413 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Importing CVL tables The conversion loss table to be used for a particular range is also defined in the "Exter- nal Mixer Configuration" dialog box. All tables stored on the R&S FSW in the C:\r_s\instr\user\cvl\ directory are offered for selection.
Page 414 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Example: For example, for the level measured at the frequency 50 GHz, 43 correction levels are defined: ● 21 for the frequencies 48.075 GHz, 49.125 GHz, 49.175 GHz, ..., 49.975 GHz ●...
Page 415 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Signal ID function Two sweeps are performed alternately. Trace 1 shows the trace measured on the upper side band (USB) of the LO (the test sweep), trace 2 shows the trace measured on the lower side band (LSB), i.e.
Page 416 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output played in any of the traces 1 to 3. Unwanted mixer products are suppressed in this cal- culated trace. Test sweep and reference sweep traces Depending on which of the automatic signal identification functions are used, the traces are used to display either the test sweep (the upper side-band sweep) or the ref- erence sweep (lower side-band sweep).
Page 417 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Such mixer products cannot be identified by the Auto ID function. It is therefore recom- mended that you perform a visual comparison of the test sweep and reference sweep using the Signal ID function. Examining unwanted mixer products with small span With large spans in which non-modulated sine-wave signals are represented as single lines, unwanted mixer products are generally completely blanked out.
Page 418 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Figure 8-18: Different mixer products displayed at the same frequency in the test sweep and refer- ence sweep (large span) Example: The external mixer is set to use the 2nd order harmonic. The signal recorded in the test sweep is displayed by trace 1.
Page 419 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Figure 8-19: Unwanted mixer products displayed for small span 8.2.5.2 External Mixer Settings Access: [INPUT/OUTPUT] > "External Mixer Config" Note that external mixers are not supported in MSRA/MSRT mode. Special conversion loss tables (in .b2g or .b5g files) cannot be edited within the R&S FSW firmware;...
Page 420 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output External Mixer (State)....................420 RF Start / RF Stop.......................420 Handover Freq......................421 Band..........................421 Overrange......................421 Preset Band........................ 421 Mixer Type........................421 Mixer Settings (Harmonics Configuration)..............422 └ Range 1/Range 2..................422 └ Harmonic Type....................422 └...
Page 421 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Handover Freq If due to the LO frequency the conversion of the input signal is not possible using one harmonic, the band must be split. An adjacent, partially overlapping frequency range can be defined using different harmonics.
Page 422 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output For more information see "External Mixers and Large Bandwidth Extension Options" on page 413. LO and IF data use the same port "2 Port" "3 Port" LO and IF data use separate ports Remote command: on page 1082 [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:PORTs...
Page 423 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output "Table" Defines the conversion loss via the table selected from the list. Pre- defined conversion loss tables are often provided with the external mixer and can be imported to the R&S FSW. Alternatively, you can define your own conversion loss tables.
Page 424 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output LO Level Defines the LO level of the external mixer's LO port. Possible values are from 13.0 dBm to 17.0 dBm in 0.1 dB steps. Default value is 15.5 dB. Remote command: on page 1076 [SENSe:]MIXer<x>:LOPower Signal ID...
Page 425 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Bias Value Define the bias current for each range, which is required to set the mixer to its optimum operating point. It corresponds to the short-circuit current. The bias current can range from -10 mA to 10 mA.
Page 426 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Table........................426 Edit Table........................426 Delete Table........................ 426 Import Table........................ 426 New Table Opens the "Edit conversion loss table" dialog box to configure a new conversion loss table. For details on table configuration, see "Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Tables"...
Page 427 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output File Name........................427 Comment........................428 Band..........................428 Harmonic Order......................428 Bias..........................428 Mixer Name.........................428 Mixer S/N........................428 Mixer Type........................429 Position/Value......................429 Insert Value......................... 429 Delete Value........................429 Shift x.......................... 429 Shift y.......................... 429 Save..........................429 File Name Defines the name under which the table is stored in the C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\cvl\ directory on the instrument.
Page 428 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Remote command: on page 1086 [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:SELect Comment An optional comment that describes the conversion loss table. The comment is user- definable. Remote command: on page 1084 [SENSe:]CORRection:CVL:COMMent Band The waveguide or user-defined band to which the table applies. This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range.
Page 429 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Mixer Type Specifies whether the external mixer to which the table applies is a two-port or three- port type. This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range.
Page 430 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output ● "To connect a three-port mixer" on page 430 ● "To connect a two-port mixer" on page 431 ● "To activate and configure the external mixer" on page 431 ● "To define a new conversion loss table" on page 432 ●...
Page 431 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output To connect a two-port mixer 1. 1. Connect the LO OUT / IF IN output of the R&S FSW to the LO/IF port of the external mixer. The nominal LO level is 15.5 dBm. Because of the diplexer contained in the R&S FSW, the IF signal can be tapped from the line which is used to feed the LO signal to the mixer.
Page 432 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output To define a new conversion loss table 1. Select "INPUT > Input Source Config > External Mixer > Conversion Loss Table". 2. Select "New Table". 3. Define a file name and, optionally, a comment for the new table. 4.
Page 433 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output ● "To set up the measurement" on page 433 ● "To activate and configure the external mixer" on page 433 ● "To take into account the cable loss in the IF path" on page 434 To set up the measurement IF IN...
Page 434 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output ters. If the selected table is not valid for the selected band, an error message is dis- played. If no conversion loss table is available yet, create a new table first (as described in "To define a new conversion loss table"...
Page 435 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output To set up the measurement IF IN LO OUT/IF IN External Mixer INPUT Figure 8-21: 3-port external mixer test setup 1. Connect the [LO] port of the external mixer to the [LO OUT / IF IN] connector of the R&S FSW.
Page 436: Output Settings
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output c) From the C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\cvl directory, select the 100112_MAG_4_B5000_3G5.B5G file. d) Select [ENTER]. 3. Switch to the "Mixer Settings" tab. 4. Select the "Mixer Type": "3-port". 5. Select "Mixer Settings > Band" to define the required frequency range. 6.
Page 437 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Data Output.........................437 Noise Source Control....................438 Data Output Defines the type of signal available at one of the output connectors of the R&S FSW. For restrictions and additional information, see Chapter 8.2.1.3, "IF and Video Signal Output", on page 364.
Page 438: Trigger Input/Output Settings
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Remote command: on page 1119 OUTPut<up>:IF[:SOURce] on page 1119 OUTPut<up>:IF:IFFRequency on page 1121 SYSTem:SPEaker:VOLume Noise Source Control The R&S FSW provides a connector ("NOISE SOURCE CONTROL") with a 28 V volt- age supply for an external noise source.
Page 439 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Defines the usage of the variable Trigger Input/Output connectors, where: "Trigger 2": Trigger Input/Output connector on the front panel (not available for R&S FSW85 models with 2 RF input connectors) "Trigger 3": Trigger 3 Input/Output connector on the rear panel (Trigger 1 is INPUT only.) "Input"...
Page 440: How To Output A Trigger Signal
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Data Input and Output Pulse Length ← Output Type ← Trigger 2/3 Defines the duration of the pulse (pulse width) sent as a trigger to the output connector. Remote command: on page 1063 OUTPut:TRIGger<tp>:PULSe:LENGth Send Trigger ← Output Type ← Trigger 2/3 Sends a user-defined trigger to the output connector immediately.
Page 441: Frequency And Span Configuration
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Frequency and Span Configuration 8.3 Frequency and Span Configuration The frequency and span settings define the scope of the signal and spectrum to be analyzed with the R&S FSW. ● Impact of the Frequency and Span Settings............
Page 442 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Frequency and Span Configuration For example, to analyze signal harmonics, you can define the step size to be equal to the center frequency. In this case, each stroke of the arrow key selects the center fre- quency of another harmonic.
Page 443: Frequency And Span Settings
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Frequency and Span Configuration Insufficient measurement points - Resolution filter bandwidth Resolution filter bandwidth covers Filter may miss a signal covers one measurement point several measurement points 8.3.2 Frequency and Span Settings Access: "Overview" > "Frequency" For more information see Chapter 8.3.4, "How To Define the Frequency Range",...
Page 444 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Frequency and Span Configuration Center Frequency....................... 444 Span..........................444 Start / Stop........................445 Frequency Axis Scaling....................445 Full Span........................445 Zero Span........................445 Last Span........................445 Center Frequency Stepsize..................445 Frequency Offset......................446 Center Frequency Defines the center frequency of the signal in Hertz. The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency span.
Page 445 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Frequency and Span Configuration Start / Stop Defines the start and stop frequencies. The following range of values is allowed: ≤ f ≤ f – span start + span ≤ f ≤ f stop and span are specified in the data sheet.
Page 446: Keeping The Center Frequency Stable - Signal Tracking
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Frequency and Span Configuration The step size can be coupled to the span (span > 0) or the resolution bandwidth (span = 0), or it can be manually set to a fixed value. For more details see Chapter 8.3.1.2, "Stepping Through the Frequency Range - Cen- ter Frequency Stepsize",...
Page 447: How To Define The Frequency Range
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Frequency and Span Configuration this case, the signal trace is surveyed in a specified bandwidth around the expected center frequency. After each sweep, the center frequency is set to the maximum signal found within the searched bandwidth. If no maximum signal above a defined threshold value is found in the searched bandwidth, the center frequency remains unchanged.
Page 448: How To Move The Center Frequency Through The Frequency Range
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chap- ter 14.7.1, "Defining the Frequency and Span", on page 1024. To configure the frequency and span Frequency and span settings can be configured via the "Frequency" dialog box. Signal tracking is configured in the "Signal Tracking"...
Page 449: Impact Of The Vertical Axis Settings
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration ● Impact of the Vertical Axis Settings...............449 ● Amplitude Settings....................451 ● Scaling the Y-Axis....................456 ● How to Optimize the Amplitude Display..............458 8.4.1 Impact of the Vertical Axis Settings Some background knowledge on the impact of the described settings is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration.
Page 450 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration To determine the required offset, consider the external attenuation or gain applied to the input signal. For attenuation, define a positive offset so the R&S FSW increases the displayed power values. If an external gain is applied, define a negative offset so the R&S FSW decreases the displayed power values.
Page 451: Amplitude Settings
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration For ideal sinusoidal signals, the displayed signal level is independent of the RF attenu- ation. Depending on the type of measurement you must find a compromise between a low noise floor and high intermodulation levels, and protecting the instrument from high input levels.
Page 452 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration Reference Level......................452 └ Shifting the Display (Offset)................453 └ Unit........................453 └ Setting the Reference Level Automatically (Auto Level).......454 Attenuation......................454 └ Attenuation Mode / Value................454 Using Electronic Attenuation..................454 Input Settings......................
Page 453 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration Remote command: on page 1040 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel Shifting the Display (Offset) ← Reference Level Defines an arithmetic level offset. This offset is added to the measured level. In some result displays, the scaling of the y-axis is changed accordingly. Define an offset if the signal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the R&S FSW so the application shows correct power results.
Page 454 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration Setting the Reference Level Automatically (Auto Level) ← Reference Level Automatically determines a reference level which ensures that no overload occurs at the R&S FSW for the current input data. At the same time, the internal attenuators and the preamplifier (for analog baseband input: the full scale level) are adjusted so the sig- nal-to-noise ratio is optimized, while signal compression and clipping are minimized.
Page 455 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration When you switch off electronic attenuation, the RF attenuation is automatically set to the same mode (auto/manual) as the electronic attenuation was set to. Thus, the RF attenuation can be set to automatic mode, and the full attenuation is provided by the mechanical attenuator, if possible.
Page 456: Scaling The Y-Axis
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration When you connect the external preamplifier, the R&S FSW reads out the touchdown (.S2P) file from the EEPROM of the preamplifier. This file contains the s-parameters of the preamplifier. As soon as you connect the preamplifier to the R&S FSW, the pream- plifier is permanently on and ready to use.
Page 457 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration Range..........................457 Ref Level Position....................... 457 Auto Scale Once......................458 Scaling........................458 Range Defines the displayed y-axis range in dB. The default value is 100 dB. Remote command: on page 1046 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe] Ref Level Position Defines the reference level position, i.e.
Page 458: How To Optimize The Amplitude Display
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration Auto Scale Once Automatically determines the optimal range and reference level position to be dis- played for the current measurement settings. The display is only set once; it is not adapted further if the measurement settings are changed again.
Page 459: Bandwidth, Filter And Sweep Configuration
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration 5. To detect a spurious signal close to the noise floor: ● Set the "RF Attenuation" to "Manual" mode and reduce the "Value" to lower the noise floor. ● Select "Relative" - "Logarithmic" scaling. Now you can determine if any spurious levels of a certain size are visible.
Page 460 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration 8.5.1.1 Separating Signals by Selecting an Appropriate Resolution Bandwidth The resolution bandwidth defines the 3 dB bandwidth of the resolution filter to be used. An RF sinusoidal signal is displayed according to the passband characteristic of the resolution filter (RBW), i.e.
Page 461 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration The level of a sine wave signal is not influenced by the video bandwidth. A sine wave signal can therefore be freed from noise by using a video bandwidth that is small com- pared with the resolution bandwidth, and thus be measured more accurately.
Page 462 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration A higher span/RBW ratio (i.e. low RBW values and large frequency spans), however, results in large amounts of data. 8.5.1.5 How Data is Measured: the Sweep Type In a standard analog frequency sweep, the local oscillator of the analyzer sweeps the applied signal quasi analog from the start to the stop frequency to determine the fre- quency spectrum.
Page 463 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration For general purpose measurements, an "Auto" mode is available, which provides a compromise between a large dynamic range and a fast sweep. In this case, a medium-sized subspan is used. FFT mode and external mixers (R&S FSW-B21) The subspan optimation modes "Dynamic"...
Page 464 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration Normal (3 dB) Gaussian filters Gaussian filters provide a good compromise between steep edges and a short settling time. This filter is suitable for most measurement tasks and is used by default. The available Gaussian (3 dB) filters are listed in the R&S FSW data sheet.
Page 465: Bandwidth, Filter And Sweep Settings
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration the instrument, occupying a large amount of memory, and each sweep point increases the overall measurement time. The number of sweeps to be performed in single sweep mode is defined by the "Sweep Count".
Page 466 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration Figure 8-24: Bandwidth dialog box for RF measurements Figure 8-25: Sweep dialog box for spectrogram display User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 43...
Page 467 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration RBW..........................467 VBW..........................467 Sweep Time........................ 468 Span/RBW........................468 RBW/VBW........................468 Filter Type........................469 Default Coupling......................469 Sweep/Average Count....................470 Sweep Points......................470 Optimization........................ 470 Sweep Type........................ 471 Subspans......................472 Single Sweep / Run Single..................472 Continuous Sweep / Run Cont..................472...
Page 468 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration "Manual" For manual mode, define the bandwidth value. The available video bandwidths are specified in the data sheet. Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible bandwidth. If the video bandwidth is defined manually, a green bullet is displayed next to the "VBW"...
Page 469 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration For more information see Chapter 8.5.1.3, "Coupling VBW and RBW", on page 461. "Sine[1/1]" "Video Bandwidth" = "Resolution Bandwidth" This is the default setting for the coupling ratio RBW/VBW and is rec- ommended if sinusoidal signals are to be measured.
Page 470 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration Sweep/Average Count Defines the number of sweeps to be performed in the single sweep mode. Values from 0 to 200000 are allowed. If the values 0 or 1 are set, one sweep is performed. The sweep count is applied to all the traces in all diagrams.
Page 471 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration Table 8-2: Optimization parameters in FFT mode Optimization mode Description Dynamic Optimizes the dynamic range by using the narrowest possible subspan (depending on the RBW). The autorange function for the internal IF gain calculation is activated to obtain the best control range for the A/D converter.
Page 472 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration "FFT" The FFT sweep samples on a defined frequency value and trans- forms it to the spectrum by fast Fourier transformation (FFT) (see also Chapter 8.5.1.5, "How Data is Measured: the Sweep Type", on page 462).
Page 473 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration While the measurement is running, the "Continuous Sweep" softkey and the [RUN CONT] key are highlighted. The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again. The results are not deleted until a new measurement is started.
Page 474: Reference: List Of Available Rrc And Channel Filters
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration ● When the average or peak values are determined for the new sweep, the results of the previous sweeps in the spectrogram are also taken into account. ● The average or peak values are determined from the results of the newly swept frames only.
Page 475 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Bandwidth, Filter and Sweep Configuration Filter Bandwidth Filter Type Application 2.7 kHz CFILter 3 kHz CFILter 3.4 kHz CFILter 4 kHz CFILter DAB, Satellite 4.5 kHz CFILter 5 kHz CFILter 6 kHz CFILter 6 kHz, a=0.2 APCO 8.5 kHz CFILter...
Page 476: Trigger And Gate Configuration
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration Filter Bandwidth Filter Type Application 3 MHz CFILter 3.75 MHz CFILter 3.84 MHz, a=0.22 W-CDMA 3GPP 4.096 MHz, a=0.22 W-CDMA NTT DOCoMo 5 MHz CFILter 10 MHz *) CFILter 20 MHz *) CFILter 28 MHz *) CFILter...
Page 477 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration For complex tasks, advanced trigger settings are available: ● Hysteresis to avoid unwanted trigger events caused by noise ● Holdoff to define exactly which trigger event will cause the trigger in a jittering sig- ●...
Page 478 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration Example: In the following example, the second possible trigger event on the rising edge is ignored as the signal does not drop below the hysteresis (threshold) before it reaches the trigger level again. On the falling edge, however, two trigger events occur as the signal exceeds the hysteresis before it falls to the trigger level the second time.
Page 479 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration Drop-out times for falling edge triggers If a trigger is set to a falling edge ("Slope" = "Falling", see "Slope" on page 486) the measurement is to start when the power level falls below a certain level. This is useful, for example, to trigger at the end of a burst, similar to triggering on the rising edge for the beginning of a burst.
Page 480 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration 8.6.1.2 Trigger Settings Access: "Overview" > "Trigger/Gate" External triggers from one of the TRIGGER INPUT / OUTPUT connectors on the R&S FSW are configured in a separate tab of the dialog box. Chapter 8.2.7, "Trigger Input/Output Settings", on page 438...
Page 481 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration └ Power Sensor....................484 └ Time......................484 Trigger Level....................... 484 Repetition Interval....................... 485 Drop-Out Time......................485 Trigger Offset......................485 Hysteresis........................485 Trigger Holdoff......................486 Slope........................... 486 Preview The preview mode allows you to try out trigger and gate settings before actually apply- ing them to the current measurement.
Page 482 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration Trigger Source Selects the trigger source. If a trigger source other than "Free Run" is set, "TRG" is dis- played in the channel bar and the trigger source is indicated. For gated measurements, this setting also selects the gating source. For more information see "Trigger Source"...
Page 483 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration on page 1053 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce SWE:EGAT:SOUR EXT for gated triggering, see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce on page 1060 Video ← Trigger Source Defines triggering by the video signal, i.e. the filtered and detected version of the input signal (the envelope of the IF signal), as displayed on the screen.
Page 484 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration For this purpose, the instrument uses a level detector at the first intermediate fre- quency. The input signal must be in the frequency range between 500 MHz and 8 GHz. The resulting trigger level at the RF input depends on the RF attenuation and preampli- fication.
Page 485 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration Remote command: on page 1052 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:IFPower on page 1052 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:IQPower on page 1051 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel[:EXTernal<port>] on page 1053 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:VIDeo on page 1052 TRIGger[:SEQuence]:LEVel:RFPower Repetition Interval Defines the repetition interval for a time trigger. The shortest interval is 2 ms. The repetition interval should be set to the exact pulse period, burst length, frame length or other repetitive signal characteristic.
Page 486 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration Trigger Holdoff Defines the minimum time (in seconds) that must pass between two trigger events. Trigger events that occur during the holdoff time are ignored. For more information, see "Trigger Holdoff" on page 479.
Page 487: Gating
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration To define an external trigger: 1. Connect an external device that will provide the trigger signal to one of the TRIG- GER INPUT / OUTPUT connectors on the R&S FSW (for details see the R&S FSW "Getting Started"...
Page 488 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration 8.6.2.1 Gated Measurements Like a gate provides an opening in a fence, a gated measurement lets data from the input signal pass in defined areas only. The gate controls exactly when data is included in the measurement results and when not.
Page 489 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration Example: By using a gate in sweep mode and stopping the measurement while the gate signal is inactive, the spectrum for pulsed RF carriers can be displayed without the superposi- tion of frequency components generated during switching. Similarly, the spectrum can also be analyzed for an inactive carrier.
Page 490 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration To indicate that a gate is used for the sweep, "GAT" and the gate source is displayed in the channel bar. Continuous gating With common gating, a measurement is performed each time the trigger event occurs. However, when using an external trigger, the measurement time for a single gate is restricted by the repetition rate of the external trigger.
Page 491 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration Restrictions for continuous gating While continuous gating reduces the number of required external trigger events, not every sweep constellation can be performed using just one external trigger event. Note the following restrictions: ●...
Page 492 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration Gate settings define one or more extracts of the signal to be measured. Gating is not available for measurements on I/Q-based data. Gated Trigger......................492 Gate Mode........................492 Gate Delay........................493 Gate Length........................
Page 493 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration "Level" The trigger event for the gate to open is a particular power level. After the gate signal has been detected, the gate remains open until the signal disappears. Note: If you perform gated measurements in combination with the IF Power trigger, the R&S FSW ignores the holding time for frequency sweep, FFT sweep, zero span and I/Q mode measurements.
Page 494 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration For details see "Continuous gating" on page 490. Continuous Gate......................494 Gate Period Length..................... 494 Gate Period Count...................... 494 Continuous Gate Activates or deactivates continuous gating. This setting is only available if Gated Trigger is "On".
Page 495 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration Gate Source Mode...................... 495 Source.........................495 Level..........................495 Polarity........................495 Gate Source Mode Determines whether the same or different triggers are used for general measurement and gating. "AUTO" (Default:) The trigger defined by Trigger Source is used both for the general measurement trigger and the gating trigger.
Page 496 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Trigger and Gate Configuration Remote command: on page 1059 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:POLarity 8.6.2.5 How to Configure a Gated Measurement A gated measurement records data only while the gate conditions are fulfilled. These step-by-step instructions demonstrate how to configure a gated measurement man- ually.
Page 497: Adjusting Settings Automatically
® Common Measurement Settings R&S Adjusting Settings Automatically 6. Define the length in seconds from the beginning of one gate measurement to the beginning of the next one ("Gate Period Length"). 7. Define how many gate measurements are to be performed after a single trigger event ("Gate Period Count").
Page 498 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Adjusting Settings Automatically MSRA/MSRT operating mode In MSRA and MSRT operating mode, settings related to data acquisition can only be adjusted automatically for the MSRA/MSRT Master, not the applications. Adjusting settings automatically during triggered measurements When you select an auto adjust function, a measurement is performed to determine the optimal settings.
Page 499 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Adjusting Settings Automatically Remote command: on page 1066 [SENSe:]ADJust:FREQuency Setting the Reference Level Automatically (Auto Level) Automatically determines a reference level which ensures that no overload occurs at the R&S FSW for the current input data. At the same time, the internal attenuators and the preamplifier (for analog baseband input: the full scale level) are adjusted so the sig- nal-to-noise ratio is optimized, while signal compression and clipping are minimized.
Page 500 ® Common Measurement Settings R&S Adjusting Settings Automatically Lower Level Hysteresis When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the Auto Level function, the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted. To avoid frequent adapta- tion due to small changes in the input signal, you can define a hysteresis. This setting defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below (compared to the last measure- ment) before the reference level is adapted automatically.
Page 501: Common Analysis And Display Functions
® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Result Display Configuration 9 Common Analysis and Display Functions Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" General methods and basic settings to display and analyze measurements, regardless of the operating mode, are described here. If you are performing a specific measure- ment task, using an operating mode other than Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode, or an application other than the Spectrum application, be sure to check the specific application or mode description for settings and functions that may deviate from these...
Page 502 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Result Display Configuration Diagram Displays a basic level vs. frequency or level vs. time diagram of the measured data to evaluate the results graphically. This is the default evaluation method. Which data is displayed in the diagram depends on the "Trace"...
Page 503 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Result Display Configuration (See Chapter 9.3.3.1, "Marker Search Settings", on page 524). Tip: To navigate within long marker peak lists, simply scroll through the entries with your finger on the touchscreen. Remote command: LAY:ADD? '1',RIGH, PEAK, see on page 1015 LAYout:ADD[:WINDow]?
Page 504: Laying Out The Result Display With The Smartgrid
® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Result Display Configuration 9.1.2 Laying out the Result Display with the SmartGrid Measurement results can be evaluated in many different ways, for example graphically, as summary tables, statistical evaluations etc. Each type of evaluation is displayed in a separate window in the channel tab.
Page 505 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Result Display Configuration Figure 9-1: Moving a window in SmartGrid mode The brown area indicates the possible "drop area" for the window, i.e. the area in which the window can be placed. A blue area indicates the (approximate) layout of the win- dow as it would be if the icon were dropped at the current position.
Page 506 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Result Display Configuration SmartGrid functions Once the evaluation icon has been dropped, icons in each window provide delete and move functions. The "Move" icon allows you to move the position of the window, possibly changing the size and position of the other displayed windows.
Page 507 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Result Display Configuration Remote command: on page 1015 / LAYout:ADD[:WINDow]? LAYout:WINDow<n>:ADD? on page 1019 9.1.2.4 How to Close a Result Window ► To close a window, activate SmartGrid mode and select the "Delete" icon for the window.
Page 508: Zoomed Displays
® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Zoomed Displays on page 1017 LAYout:MOVE[:WINDow] 9.2 Zoomed Displays You can zoom into the diagram to visualize the measurement results in greater detail. Using the touchscreen or a mouse pointer you can easily define the area to be enlarged.
Page 509: Single Zoom Versus Multiple Zoom
® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Zoomed Displays 9.2.1 Single Zoom Versus Multiple Zoom Two different (graphical) zoom modes are available: single zoom and multiple zoom. A single zoom replaces the current diagram by a new diagram which displays an enlarged extract of the trace.
Page 510: Zoom Functions
® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Zoomed Displays Using the zoom area to restrict a peak search The selected zoom area can be used to restrict the search range for a peak search, but only in single zoom mode (see "Use Zoom Limits"...
Page 511 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Zoomed Displays Measurement Zoom As opposed to the graphical zoom, which is merely a visual tool, the measurement zoom adapts the measurement settings such that the data you are interested in is dis- played in the required detail.
Page 512: How To Zoom Into A Diagram
® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Zoomed Displays Restores the original display, that is, the originally calculated displays for the entire capture buffer, and closes all zoom windows. Note: This function only restores graphically zoomed displays. Measurement zooms, for which measurement settings were adapted, are recalculated based on the adapted measurement settings.
Page 513 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Zoomed Displays To zoom into the diagram at one position Click on the "Single Zoom" icon in the toolbar. Zoom mode is activated. 2. Tap and drag your finger in the diagram to select the area to be enlarged. The selected area is indicated by a dotted rectangle.
Page 514 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Zoomed Displays 2. Select the first area in the diagram to be enlarged as described in "To zoom into the diagram at one position" on page 513. The selected area is indicated by a dot- ted rectangle.
Page 515: Marker Usage
® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage To perform a measurement zoom Performing a measurement zoom automatically adapts the measurement settings to reflect a graphically zoomed display. 1. Select the "Measurement Zoom" icon from the toolbar. 2. Do one of the following to define the zoom area: ●...
Page 516 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage ● The easiest way to work with markers is using the touch screen. Simply double-tap the diagram near a peak. A marker is automatically inserted at the closest detected peak. If necessary, drag the marker and drop it at a different position. When a marker label is selected, a vertical line is displayed which indicates the marker's current x- value.
Page 517 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage ● To determine more sophisticated marker results, use the special functions in the "Marker Function" dialog box. In addition to basic markers, sophisticated marker functions are provided for special results such as noise or band power measurements. ●...
Page 518: Marker Settings
® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage The results can be displayed directly within the diagram area or in a separate table. By default, the first two active markers are displayed in the diagram area. If more markers are activated, the results are displayed in a marker table.
Page 519 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chap- ter 14.8.3.1, "Setting Up Individual Markers", on page 1151. ● Individual Marker Setup..................519 ● General Marker Settings..................522 9.3.2.1 Individual Marker Setup Up to 17 markers or delta markers can be activated for each window simultaneously.
Page 520 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage Marker State Activates or deactivates the marker in the diagram. Remote command: on page 1155 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe] on page 1153 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe] Marker Position X-value Defines the position (x-value) of the marker in the diagram. For normal markers, the absolute position is indicated.
Page 521 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage Linking to Another Marker Links the current marker to the marker selected from the list of active markers. If the x- axis value of the initial marker is changed, the linked marker follows to the same posi- tion on the x-axis.
Page 522 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage All Markers Off Deactivates all markers in one step. Remote command: on page 1155 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:AOFF 9.3.2.2 General Marker Settings Some general marker settings allow you to influence the marker behavior for all mark- ers.
Page 523 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage Marker Info Turns the marker information displayed in the diagram on and off. Remote command: on page 1157 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:MINFo[:STATe] Marker Stepsize Defines the size of the steps that the marker position is moved using the rotary knob. "Standard"...
Page 524: Marker Search Settings And Positioning Functions
® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage 9.3.3 Marker Search Settings and Positioning Functions Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Marker" > "Search" or: [MKR TO] Several functions are available to set the marker to a specific position very quickly and easily, or to use the current marker position to define another characteristic value.
Page 525 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage Search Limits......................526 └ Search Limits (Left / Right)................526 └ Search Threshold..................526 └ Use Zoom Limits................... 526 └ Deactivating All Search Limits..............526 Search Mode for Next Peak Selects the search mode for the next peak search. "Left"...
Page 526 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage For EMI measurements, these functions are not available; use Automatic Peak Search instead (see Chapter 7.13.4.2, "EMI Final Measurement Configuration", on page 346). Remote command: on page 1162 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:AUTO on page 1164 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MINimum:AUTO Search Limits The search results can be restricted by limiting the search area or adding search con-...
Page 527 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage Search Mode for Next Peak in X-Direction..............527 Search Mode for Next Peak in Y-Direction..............527 Marker Search Type....................528 Marker Search Area....................528 Exclude LO........................528 Peak Excursion......................529 Auto Max Peak Search / Auto Min Peak Search............529 Search Limits......................
Page 528 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage "Up" Determines the next maximum/minimum above the current peak (in more recent frames). "Absolute" Determines the next maximum/minimum above or below the current peak (in all frames). "Down" Determines the next maximum/minimum below the current peak (in older frames).
Page 529 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage "On" The minimum frequency included in the peak search range is ≥ 5 × resolution bandwidth (RBW). Due to the interference by the first local oscillator to the first inter- mediate frequency at the input mixer, the LO is represented as a sig- nal at 0 Hz.
Page 530 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage Search Threshold ← Search Limits Defines an absolute threshold as an additional condition for the peak search. Only peaks that exceed the threshold are detected. Remote command: on page 1161 CALCulate<n>:THReshold Use Zoom Limits ←...
Page 531: Marker (Measurement) Functions
® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage on page 1166 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:NEXT on page 1166 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt on page 1166 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:LEFT Search Minimum Sets the selected marker/delta marker to the minimum of the trace. If no marker is active, marker 1 is activated. For spectrogram displays, define which frame the minimum is to be searched in.
Page 532 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chap- ter 14.8.3, "Working with Markers", on page 1150. ● Precise Frequency (Signal Count) Marker............532 ● Measuring Noise Density (Noise Meas Marker)............534 ●...
Page 533 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage To determine the frequency of a signal point accurately without changing the sweep settings, the R&S FSW is equipped with a signal counter. The signal counter sets the RF to the current marker position, then counts the zero crossings of the IF (thus the term signal counter) and derives the precise frequency value.
Page 534 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage 9.3.4.2 Measuring Noise Density (Noise Meas Marker) Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Marker Functions" > "Select Marker Function" > "Noise Measurement" > "Noise Meas Config" Or: [MKR FUNC] > "Select Marker Function" > "Noise Measurement" > "Noise Meas Config"...
Page 535 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage the RMS value of white noise. With a logarithmic level axis, 1.45 dB is added addi- tionally. Logarithmic averaging is thus fully taken into account, which yields a value that is 1.45 dB lower than that of linear averaging. ●...
Page 536 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage on page 1185 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe:RESult? Marker State........................536 Marker Type........................ 536 Noise Measurement State...................536 Switching All Noise Measurement Off................. 536 Marker State Activates or deactivates the marker in the diagram. Remote command: on page 1155 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe] on page 1153 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe]...
Page 537 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage 9.3.4.3 Phase Noise Measurement Marker Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Marker Functions" > "Phase Noise" > "Phase Noise Config" Or: [MKR FUNC] > "Select Marker Function" > "Phase Noise" > "Phase Noise Config" For each of the 16 markers phase noise measurement can be activated.
Page 538 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage Remote commands: on page 1188 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise[:STATe] on page 1188 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise:RESult? Phase Noise Measurement State................538 Defining Reference Point.................... 539 Switching All Phase Noise Measurements Off............539 Phase Noise Measurement State Activates or deactivates phase noise measurement for the reference point in the dia- gram.
Page 539 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage If activated, the delta markers display the phase noise measured at defined offsets from the reference position. Remote command: on page 1187 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise[:STATe] on page 1186 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise:RESult? Defining Reference Point Instead of using marker 1 as the reference marker, a fixed reference marker can be defined for phase noise measurement.
Page 540 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage Figure 9-5: n dB down marker function The following marker function results are displayed: Table 9-1: n dB down marker function results Label Description Current position and level of marker 1 Offset value (n dB down) ndB down Bw / Determined bandwidth or pulse width (zero span) at the offset...
Page 541 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage on page 1194 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:RESult? n dB down Marker State....................541 n dB down Value......................541 n dB down Marker State Activates or deactivates the special n dB down marker function. Remote command: on page 1194 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:STATe on page 1194...
Page 542 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage You can move the position of the fixed reference marker graphically by dragging the display lines, or numerically by entering values for the marker position and level. Remote commands: "Example: Using a Fixed Reference Marker" on page 1203 on page 1180 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed[:STATe]...
Page 543 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage Relative band power markers The results for band power markers which are defined as delta markers and thus have a reference value can also be calculated as reference power values (in dB). For analog demodulation measurements, relative band power markers are not availa- ble.
Page 544 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage All markers can be defined as band power markers, each with a different span. When a band power marker is activated, if no marker is active yet, marker 1 is activated. Other- wise, the currently active marker is used as a band power marker (all other marker functions for this marker are deactivated).
Page 545 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage Remote command: on page 1190 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer[:STATe] on page 1192 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer[:STATe] Span Defines the span (band) around the marker for which the power is measured. The span is indicated by lines in the diagram. Remote command: on page 1190 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:SPAN...
Page 546 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage audio output. Thus, a displayed signal can be identified acoustically with the help of the internal loudspeaker or with headphones. This function is not available for Spectrum Emission Mask measurements or measure- ments on I/Q-based data.
Page 547 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage Remote command: on page 1199 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation[:STATe] Continuous Demodulation If activated, the signal is demodulated continuously (not only at the marker position) and sent to the audio output. This allows you to monitor the frequency range acousti- cally (assuming the sweep time is long enough).
Page 548 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage Remote command: on page 1199 [SENSe:]DEMod:SQUelch:LEVel 9.3.4.8 Marker Peak List Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Marker Functions" > "Marker Peak List" Or: [MKR FUNC] > "Marker Peak List" A common measurement task is to determine peak values, i.e. maximum or minimum signal levels.
Page 549 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage Figure 9-6: Trace example The following table lists the peaks as indicated by the marker numbers in the diagram above, as well as the minimum decrease in amplitude to either side of the peak: Marker # Min.
Page 550 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage ment result, keeps the delta frequency value. Therefore the phase noise measurement leads to reliable results in a certain offset although the source is drifting. Using a peak as a fixed reference marker Some results are analyzed in relation to a peak value, for example a carrier frequency level.
Page 551 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage For each listed peak the frequency/time ("X-value") and level ("Y-Value") values are given. Remote command: on page 1183 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:STATe Sort Mode Defines whether the peak list is sorted according to the x-values or y-values. In either case the values are sorted in ascending order.
Page 552: How To Work With Markers
® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage All special marker functions can be deactivated in one step. Remote command: on page 1189 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:AOFF on page 1184 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NOISe:AOFF on page 1188 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise:AOFF 9.3.5 How to Work With Markers The following step-by-step instructions demonstrate in detail how to work with markers. ●...
Page 553 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage 9.3.5.2 How to Use a Fixed Reference Marker By default, delta markers refer to marker 1. However, they can also refer to a fixed ref- erence marker. How to Define and Move a Fixed Reference Marker 1.
Page 554 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage 3. Select the "Select Marker Function" softkey. 4. Select the "Marker Demodulation" button. 5. Select the "Marker Demod Config" softkey. The marker function results are determined immediately according to the default settings.
Page 555: Measurement Example: Measuring Harmonics Using Marker Functions
® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Marker Usage 9. In the file selection dialog box, select the storage location and file name for the export file. 10. Select "Save" to close the dialog box and export the peak list data to the file. 9.3.6 Measurement Example: Measuring Harmonics Using Marker Func- tions This measurement example describes how to measure harmonics using the provided...
Page 556: Display And Limit Lines
® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines Figure 9-7: Fundamental wave and the frequency and level reference point 7. Make the step size for the center frequency correspond to the signal frequency: in the "Frequency" configuration dialog box, select "Center Frequency Stepsize" = "Marker".
Page 557: Display Lines
® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines Display lines are only available in the Spectrum and (optional) Analog Demodulation applications. In the I/Q Analyzer application, lines are only available for measurements in the fre- quency domain. Access: "Overview"...
Page 558 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines Four vertical and two horizontal lines can be defined in the display. Vertical Line <x>......................558 Horizontal Line 1/ Horizontal Line 2................558 Vertical Line <x> Activates a vertical display line in the diagram at the specified point of the x-axis, depending on the scale of the axis.
Page 559: Limit Lines
® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines a) Sselect "Horizontal Line 1" or 2. b) Enter the y-value at which the line is to be displayed. 9.4.2 Limit Lines Limit lines allow you to check automatically whether the measured points are below or above specified values.
Page 560 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines ● The entered frequencies or times need not necessarily be selectable in R&S FSW. A limit line may also exceed the specified frequency or time range. The minimum frequency for a data point is -200 GHz, the maximum frequency is 200 GHz. For the time range representation, negative times may also be entered.
Page 561 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines Offsets and Shifting A configured limit line can easily be moved vertically or horizontally. Two different methods to do so are available: ● An offset moves the entire line in the diagram without editing the configured values or positions of the individual data points.
Page 562 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines Figure 9-9: Margin violation for limit check Figure 9-10: Limit violation for limit check User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 43...
Page 563 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines Storing and Recalling Limit Lines Limit lines can be stored with the configuration settings so they can be recalled for other measurements at a later time (seeChapter 11.3, "Storing and Recalling Instru- ment Settings and Measurement Data", on page 625).
Page 564 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines For the limit line overview, the R&S FSW searches for all stored limit lines with the file extension .LIN in the limits subfolder of the main installation folder. The overview allows you to determine which limit lines are available and can be used for the current measurement.
Page 565 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines Unit The unit in which the y-values of the data points of the limit line are defined. Compatibility Indicates whether the limit line definition is compatible with the current measurement settings.
Page 566 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines This setting does not have any effect on limit lines that are defined by absolute values for the x-axis. Remote command: on page 1214 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol:OFFSet Y-Offset Shifts a limit line that has relative values for the y-axis (levels or linear units such as volt) vertically.
Page 567 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines Name...........................567 Comment........................567 Threshold........................567 Margin......................... 568 X-Axis..........................568 Y-Axis.......................... 568 Data Points........................568 Insert Value......................... 569 Delete Value........................569 Shift x.......................... 569 Shift y.......................... 569 Save..........................569 Import.......................... 569 └ File Explorer....................569 Export..........................569 └...
Page 568 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines For details on thresholds see "Thresholds" on page 560. Remote command: on page 1217 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer:THReshold on page 1221 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer:THReshold Margin Defines a margin for the limit line. The default setting is 0 dB (i.e. no margin). For details on margins see "Limits and Margins"...
Page 569 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines Remote command: on page 1212 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:CONTrol[:DATA] on page 1215 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:LOWer[:DATA] on page 1218 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:UPPer[:DATA] Insert Value Inserts a data point in the limit line above the selected one in the "Edit Limit Line" dia- log box.
Page 570 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines For details on the file format see Chapter 9.4.2.4, "Reference: Limit Line File Format", on page 574. The limit line can be imported again later by the R&S FSW for use in other measure- ments.
Page 571 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines How to activate and deactivate a limit check A limit check is automatically performed as soon as any of the limit lines is activated. 1. To activate a limit check: Select the "Check Traces"...
Page 572 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines How to configure a new limit line 1. In the "Line Config" dialog box, select the "New" button. The "Edit Limit Line" dialog box is displayed. The current line configuration is dis- played in the preview area of the dialog box.
Page 573 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines How to move the limit line vertically or horizontally A configured limit line can easily be moved vertically or horizontally. Thus, a new limit line can be easily generated based upon an existing limit line which has been shifted horizontally.
Page 574 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Display and Limit Lines 2. Select the "New" or "Edit" button. 3. Select "Import" to load a limit line from a file. You are asked whether you would like to save the current configuration on the R&S FSW first.
Page 575: Trace Configuration
® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration File contents Description XAxisUnit;FREQ_HZ Unit of x values XAxisScaleMode;ABSOLUTE Scaling of x-axis (absolute or relative) YAxisUnit;LEVEL_DB Unit of y values YAxisScaleMode;ABSOLUTE Scaling of y-axis (absolute or relative) NoOfPoints;5 Number of points the line is defined by Data section for individual data points -4500000000;-50 x- and y-values of each data point defining the line...
Page 576 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration Example: Assume the following measurement parameters: ● Sample rate: 32 MSamples / s ● sweep points: 1000 ● sweep time: 100 ms ● Span: 5 GHz During a single sweep, 3.2 * 10 samples are collected and distributed to 1000 sweep points, i.e.
Page 577 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration Detector Abbrev. Description Average Calculates the linear average of all samples contained in a sweep point. To this effect, R&S FSW uses the linear voltage after envelope detection. The sampled linear values are summed up and the sum is divided by the number of samples (= linear average value).
Page 578 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration Measurement point n Meas. point n+1 video video Video signal signal Signal SAMPLE s1 s2 s3 s4 s5 s6 s1 s2 s3 s4 s5 s6 MAX PEAK AUTO PEAK MIN PEAK You can define the trace detector to be used for the individual traces manually, or the R&S FSW can select the appropriate detector automatically.
Page 579 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration Analyzing Several Traces - Trace Mode If several sweep are performed one after the other, or continuous sweep are per- formed, the trace mode determines how the data for subsequent traces is processed. After each sweep, the trace mode determines whether: ●...
Page 580 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration If you change any parameters that affect the scaling of the diagram axes, the R&S FSW automatically adapts the trace data to the changed display range. This allows you to zoom into the diagram after the measurement to show details of the trace.
Page 581 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration After the selected number of sweeps, the average trace is saved in the trace mem- ory. Until this number of sweeps is reached, a preliminary average is displayed. When the averaging length defined by the "Sweep Count" is attained, averaging is continued in continuous sweep mode or for "Continue Single Sweep"...
Page 582 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration Figure 9-13: Sample size included in trace smoothing Effects of smoothing on post-processing functions Note that in Spectrum mode, all functions performed after the sweep, such as limit checks, markers, or channel power measurements, are based on the smoothed trace data.
Page 583 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6............583 Trace Mode......................... 583 Detector........................584 Hold..........................584 Smoothing........................585 Average Mode......................585 Average Count......................585 Predefined Trace Settings - Quick Config..............586 Trace 1/ Trace 2/ Trace 3/ Trace 4 (Softkeys).............586 Copy Trace........................586...
Page 584 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration "Min Hold" The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed. The R&S FSW saves each trace point in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one. The "Detector"...
Page 585 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration Smoothing If enabled, the trace is smoothed by the specified value (between 1 % and 50 %). The smoothing value is defined as a percentage of the display width. The larger the smoothing value, the greater the smoothing effect.
Page 586 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration This value is identical to the Sweep/Average Count setting in the "Sweep" settings. Remote command: on page 1129 [SENSe:]AVERage<n>:COUNt Predefined Trace Settings - Quick Config Commonly required trace settings have been predefined and can be applied very quickly by selecting the appropriate button.
Page 587 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration The first group of buttons (labeled "Trace 1" to "Trace 6") selects the source trace. The second group of buttons (labeled "Copy to Trace 1" to "Copy to Tace 6") selects the destination.
Page 588: Spectrograms
® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration 3. Select the "Copy to Trace" button for the trace to which the settings are to be applied. The settings from the source trace are applied to the destination trace. The newly configured trace (if not set to "Blank") is displayed after the next sweep.
Page 589 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration Result display The spectrogram result can consist of the following elements: Figure 9-14: Screen layout of the spectrogram result display 1 = Spectrum result display 2 = Spectrogram result display 3 = Marker list 4 = Marker 5 = Delta marker 6 = Color map...
Page 590 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration Time Frames The time information in the spectrogram is displayed vertically, along the y-axis. Each line (or trace) of the y-axis represents one or more captured sweep and is called a time frame or simply "frame".
Page 591 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration sweep mode, the frame count is irrelevant; one frame is plotted per sweep until the measurement is stopped. If you combine the two settings, 20 sweeps will be performed for each single sweep measurement.
Page 592 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration In the spectrogram result display, you can activate up to 16 markers or delta markers at the same time. Each marker can be assigned to a different frame. Therefore, in addition to the frequency you also define the frame number when activating a new marker.
Page 593 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration Figure 9-15: Three-dimensional spectrogram The number of frames displayed on the time (y-)axis is user-definable, whereas for 2- dimensional spectrograms, the number of frames is determined automatically accord- ing to the size of the window. All other spectrogram settings are identical for 3-dimen- sional and 2-dimensional spectrograms.
Page 594 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration Table 9-6: Effect of rotating the spectrogram in three dimensions Rotation to the left > focus on Rotation down > focus on fre- Rotation to the right > focus on frame quency and frame frequency Markers in three-dimensional spectrograms...
Page 595 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration Uses a color range from red to blue. Red colors indicate low levels, blue colors indicate high ones. The "Cold" color scheme is the inverse "Hot" color scheme. ● Radar Uses a color range from black over green to light turquoise with shades of green in between.
Page 596 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration Example: In the color map based on the linear color curve, the range from -100 dBm to -60 dBm is covered by blue and a few shades of green only. The range from -60 dBm to -20 dBm is covered by red, yellow and a few shades of green.
Page 597 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration Figure 9-17: Spectrogram with non-linear color curve (shape = -0.5) 9.5.2.2 Spectrogram Settings Access: [TRACE] > "Spectrogram Config" The individual settings available for spectrogram display are described here. For set- tings on color mapping, see "Color Map Settings"...
Page 598 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration State..........................598 3D Spectrogram State....................599 Select Frame.......................599 History Depth......................599 3-D Display Depth....................... 599 Time Stamp......................... 599 Color Mapping......................599 Continuous Sweep / Run Cont..................600 Single Sweep / Run Single..................600 Clear Spectrogram...................... 600 State Activates and deactivates a Spectrogram subwindow.
Page 599 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration 3D Spectrogram State Activates and deactivates a 3-dimensional spectrogram. As opposed to the common 2- dimensional spectrogram, the power is not only indicated by a color mapping, but also in a third dimension, the z-axis. For details see "Three-Dimensional Spectrograms"...
Page 600 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration Continuous Sweep / Run Cont After triggering, starts the sweep and repeats it continuously until stopped. This is the default setting. While the measurement is running, the "Continuous Sweep" softkey and the [RUN CONT] key are highlighted.
Page 601 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration Color Map Settings Access: "Overview" > "Analysis" > "Traces" > "Spectrogram" > "Color Mapping" or: [TRACE] > "Spectrogram Config" > "Color Mapping" For more information on color maps see "Color Maps" on page 594.
Page 602 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration Remote command: on page 1138 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SPECtrogram:COLor:LOWer on page 1138 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:SPECtrogram:COLor:UPPer Shape Defines the shape and focus of the color curve for the spectrogram result display. "-1 to <0" More colors are distributed among the lower values "0"...
Page 603 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration ● "To set the color curve shape graphically using the slider" on page 606 ● "To set the color curve shape numerically" on page 606 To display a spectrogram 1. In the "Overview", select "Display", then drag the evaluation type "Spectrogram" to the diagram area.
Page 604 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration c) In the "Sweep/Average Count" field, define how many sweeps are to be ana- lyzed to create a single frame. d) In the "Frame Count" field, define how many frames are to be plotted during a single sweep measurement.
Page 605 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration To set the value range graphically using the color range sliders 1. Select and drag the bottom color curve slider (indicated by a gray box at the left of the color curve pane) to the lowest value you want to include in the color mapping. 2.
Page 606: Trace Math
® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration To set the color curve shape graphically using the slider ► Select and drag the color curve shape slider (indicated by a gray box in the middle of the color curve) to the left or right. The area beneath the slider is focused, i.e. more colors are distributed there.
Page 607 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Trace Configuration Trace Math Function....................607 Trace Math Off......................607 Trace Math Position....................607 Trace Math Mode......................607 Trace Math Function Defines which trace is subtracted from trace 1. The result is displayed in trace 1. The result refers to the zero point defined with the Trace Math Position setting.
Page 608: Importing And Exporting Measurement Results For Evaluation
® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation "Lin" Activates linear subtraction, which means that the power level values are converted into linear units prior to subtraction. After the subtrac- tion, the data is converted back into its original unit. This setting takes effect if the grid is set to a linear scale.
Page 609: Displaying A Reference Trace - Importing Trace Data
® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation ● Displaying a Reference Trace - Importing Trace Data.......... 609 ● Trace/Data Ex/Import.................... 610 ● How to Import Traces....................614 ● How to Export Trace Data and Numerical Results..........614 ●...
Page 610: Trace/Data Ex/Import
® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation Example: The import file contains trace 1, trace 2, and trace 4. The current result display has 4 active traces. "Import to Trace" = 2: trace 2 of the import file is displayed as trace 2 in the result dis- play.
Page 611 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation Export all Traces and all Table Results............... 611 Include Instrument & Measurement Settings.............. 611 Trace to Export......................611 Decimal Separator...................... 612 Export Trace to ASCII File...................612 └...
Page 612 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation Decimal Separator Defines the decimal separator for floating-point numerals for the data export/import files. Evaluation programs require different separators in different languages. Remote command: on page 1229 FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator Export Trace to ASCII File Saves the selected trace or all traces in the currently active result display to the speci-...
Page 613 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation To store data permanently, select an external storage location such as a USB memory device. For details, see Chapter 5.1.7, "Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode", on page 43.
Page 614: How To Import Traces
® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation Remote command: on page 1147 FORMat:DIMPort:TRACes File Explorer ← Import ASCII File to Trace ← Importing Traces Opens the Microsoft Windows File Explorer. Remote command: not supported 9.6.3 How to Import Traces Trace data that was stored during a previous measurement can be imported to the Spectrum application, for example as a reference trace.
Page 615: How To Export A Peak List
® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation 3. Optionally, select the "Include Instrument & Measurement Settings" option to insert additional information in the export file header. 4. Select the "Export Trace to ASCII File" button. 5.
Page 616 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation For a description of the file formats for spectrum emission mask (SEM) measurement settings and results, see Chapter 7.6.8, "Reference: SEM File Descriptions", on page 273. The file format for Spurious Emissions measurement results is described in Chap- ter 7.7.6, "Reference: ASCII Export File Format...
Page 617 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation File contents Description Level Offset;0;dB Level offset Rf Att;20;dB Input attenuation El Att;2.0;dB Electrical attenuation RBW;100000;Hz Resolution bandwidth VBW;30000;Hz Video bandwidth SWT;0.005;s Sweep time Sweep Count;20; Number of sweeps set Ref Position;75;% Position of reference level referred to diagram limits (0 % =...
Page 618 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation Table 9-8: ASCII file format for spectrogram trace export File contents Description Header Type;R&S FSW; Instrument model Version;5.00; Firmware version Date;01.Oct 2006; Date of data set storage Mode;ANALYZER;SPECTROGRAM Operating mode Center Freq;55000;Hz...
Page 619 ® Common Analysis and Display Functions R&S Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation File contents Description Frame;0; Most recent frame number Timestamp;17.Mar 11;11:27:05.990 Timestamp of this frame 10000;-10.3;-15.7 Measured values, identical to spectrum data: 10130;-11.5;-16.9 <x value>, <y1>, <y2>; <y2> being available only with detector AUTOPEAK and containing in this case the smallest of the two 10360;-12.0;-17.4 measured values for a measurement point.
Page 620: Optimizing Measurements
® Optimizing Measurements R&S Improving Averaging Results 10 Optimizing Measurements 10.1 Minimizing the Measurement Duration If you want to minimize the measurement duration, try the following methods to opti- mize the measurement: ● Reduce the span of the measurement to the relevant parts of the signal only. ●...
Page 621 ® Optimizing Measurements R&S Improving Averaging Results Generally, a higher sweep time leads to more data to be averaged and thus stabilizes the results. In FFT mode, a higher sweep time means more FFTs are calculated and combined per bin. Thus, in the same capture time, the FFT mode with an RMS detector can provide bet- ter results than an averaged trace.
Page 622: Data Management
® Data Management R&S Restoring the Default Instrument Configuration (Preset) 11 Data Management The R&S FSW allows you to store and load instrument settings, as well as import and export measurement data for analysis later. Finally, you can store or print the measure- ment results displayed on the screen.
Page 623: Protecting Data Using The Secure User Mode
® Data Management R&S Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode To restore the default configuration for a single channel The default measurement settings can also be reset for an individual channel only, rather than resetting the entire instrument. ► In the "Overview", select the "Preset Channel" button. The factory default settings are restored to the current channel.
Page 624 ® Data Management R&S Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode Limited storage space The volatile memory used to store data in secure user mode is restricted to 256 MB. Thus, a "Memory full" error can occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available.
Page 625: Storing And Recalling Instrument Settings And Measurement Data
® Data Management R&S Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data Switching users when using the automatic login function In the "Start" menu, select the arrow next to the "Shut down" button and then "Log off". The "Login" dialog box is displayed, in which you can enter the different user account name and password.
Page 626: Quick Save/Quick Recall
® Data Management R&S Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data Saving instrument settings in secure user mode Be sure to store instrument settings that you require beyond the current session before SecureUser Mode is enabled; see Chapter 5.1.7, "Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode", on page 43.
Page 627 ® Data Management R&S Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data limit line or transducer files (see Chapter 11.3.2.1, "Stored Data Types", on page 629). Saving instrument settings in secure user mode Settings that are saved via Quick Save in secure user mode are stored to the SDRAM, and are only available during the current session.
Page 628: Configurable Storage And Recall
® Data Management R&S Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data QuickSave 1 / ... / QuickSave 10................628 Storage Type (Save only)....................628 Recall.......................... 628 QuickSave 1 / ... / QuickSave 10 Selects one of the save sets to store the current settings in or to be recalled. At the time of storage, the "QuickSave 1 / ...
Page 629 ® Data Management R&S Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data 11.3.2.1 Stored Data Types The following types of data can be stored to and loaded from files via the "Save" dialog box on the R&S FSW: Table 11-1: Items that can be stored to files Item Description Current Settings...
Page 630 ® Data Management R&S Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data Access: "Save"/ "Open" icon in the toolbar > "Save" / "Recall" Both dialog boxes are very similar and closely related. Selecting Storage Location - Drive/ Path/ Files............630 File Name........................631 Comment........................631 File...
Page 631 ® Data Management R&S Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data For details, see Chapter 5.1.7, "Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode", on page 43. Remote command: on page 1229 MMEMory:CATalog File Name Contains the name of the data file without the path or extension. By default, the name of a user file consists of a base name followed by an underscore.
Page 632 ® Data Management R&S Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data Note: Secure user mode. In secure user mode, settings that are stored on the instru- ment are stored to volatile memory, which is restricted to 256 MB. Thus, a "memory limit reached"...
Page 633 ® Data Management R&S Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data Startup Recall......................633 Selecting Storage Location - Drive/ Path/ Files............633 File Name........................634 Comment........................634 Startup Recall Activates or deactivates the startup recall function. If activated, the settings stored in the selected file are loaded each time the instrument is started or preset. If deactivated, the default settings are loaded.
Page 634: How To Save And Load Instrument Settings
® Data Management R&S Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data To store data permanently, select an external storage location such as a USB memory device. For details, see Chapter 5.1.7, "Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode", on page 43. Remote command: on page 1229 MMEMory:CATalog...
Page 635 ® Data Management R&S Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data To save configurable instrument settings 1. Select the "Save" icon from the toolbar. 2. In the "Save" dialog box, switch to the "Save" tab. 3. In the file selection dialog box, select a filename and storage location for the set- tings file.
Page 636: Import/Export Functions
® Data Management R&S Import/Export Functions To recall settings automatically after preset or reboot You can define the settings that are restored when you preset or reboot the instrument. 1. Configure the settings as required and save them as described in "To save configu- rable instrument settings"...
Page 637 ® Data Management R&S Import/Export Functions └ Decimal Separator................639 └ File Explorer..................639 └ Trace Export Configuration................639 └ Export......................639 └ File Explorer..................639 Import Access: "Save/Recall" > Import Provides functions to import data. Importing trace data is only available via the "Trace Config" dialog box, see Chap- ter 9.6.2, "Trace/Data Ex/Import",...
Page 638 ® Data Management R&S Import/Export Functions If the spectrogram display is selected when you perform this function, the entire histo- gram buffer with all frames is exported to a file. The data for a particular frame begins with information about the frame number and the time that frame was recorded. For large history buffers the export operation can take some time.
Page 639 ® Data Management R&S Import/Export Functions File Type ← Export Trace to ASCII File ← Export Determines the format of the ASCII file to be imported or exported. Depending on the external program in which the data file was created or is evaluated, a comma-separated list (CSV) or a plain data format (DAT) file is required.
Page 640: Creating Screenshots Of Current Measurement Results And Settings
® Data Management R&S Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings 11.5 Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings To document the graphical results and the most important settings for the currently per- formed measurement, you can create a screenshot of the current display. Screenshots can either be printed or stored to a file.
Page 641 ® Data Management R&S Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings Print Screenshot......................641 Print Multiple Windows....................642 Comment........................642 Print Logo........................642 Print Page Count......................642 Select Device 1/2......................642 Print Dialog........................643 Print Date and Time....................643 Print Screenshot Selects all measurement results displayed on the screen for the current channel (or "MultiView"): diagrams, traces, markers, marker lists, limit lines, etc., including the channel bar and status bar, for printout on a single page.
Page 642 ® Data Management R&S Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings Remote command: on page 1243 HCOPy:CONTent Print Multiple Windows Includes only the selected windows in the printout. All currently active windows for the current channel (or "MultiView") are available for selection. How many windows are printed on a single page of the printout is user-definable (see "Windows Per Page"...
Page 643 ® Data Management R&S Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings Two different printout devices can be configured, for example one for printing and one for storage to a file. When you execute the "Print immediately" function, the selected printing device and its settings determine the behavior of the R&S FSW.
Page 644 ® Data Management R&S Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings Zoom In / Zoom Out....................644 Page........................645 Zoom 1:1........................645 Page Up / Page Down....................645 Print..........................645 Zoom In / Zoom Out Zooms into (enlarges) or zooms out of (decreases) the preview display. Note that the zoom functions affect only the preview, not the printout itself.
Page 645 ® Data Management R&S Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings Fit Page Adapts the preview display zoom factor so that one complete page is visible as large as possible in the available display space. Note that the zoom functions affect only the preview, not the printout itself.
Page 646 ® Data Management R&S Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings Printer settings are (printing) device-specific. That means you can configure two differ- ent printing devices (for example, a printer and a file) and switch between configura- tions easily simply by selecting the appropriate device before printing. Select Device 1/2......................
Page 647 ® Data Management R&S Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings Destination Defines the medium to which the printout is output. "File" Stores the printout to a file in the selected format. The filename is queried at the time of storage, or a default name is used (see Sup- press File Name Dialog).
Page 648 ® Data Management R&S Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings For further information, refer to the Microsoft Windows documentation. 11.5.1.4 Page Setup Access: "Print" > "Print Config" > "Page Setup" tab Page settings are (printing) device-specific. That means you can configure two differ- ent printing devices (for example, a printer and a file) and switch between configura- tions easily simply by selecting the appropriate device before printing.
Page 649 ® Data Management R&S Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings Two different printout devices can be configured, for example one for printing and one for storage to a file. When you execute the "Print immediately" function, the selected printing device and its settings determine the behavior of the R&S FSW.
Page 650: How To Store Or Print Screenshots Of The Display
® Data Management R&S Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings The settings provided here are identical to those in the "Print Colors" section of the "Display" > "Theme + Color" dialog box. "Print Colors" on page 668. 11.5.2 How to Store or Print Screenshots of the Display The measurement results displayed on the screen can be printed or stored to a file very easily.
Page 651 ® Data Management R&S Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings To print a screenshot This configuration assumes a printer has already been installed. To install a new printer, use the Install Printer function (common Microsoft Windows procedure). 1. Select the "Printer" tool in the toolbar. The "Print Settings"...
Page 652 ® Data Management R&S Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings 9. To print another screenshot using the same configuration any other time, simply press the "Print immediate" icon at the far right end of the toolbar. If you use different printing scenarios alternately, perform the following steps to print another screenshot: a) Select the "Printer"...
Page 653: Example For Storing Multiple Measurement Results To A Pdf File
® Data Management R&S Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings 9. In the "Color" tab, define the colors to be used for the printout. a) By default, "Optimized Colors" are used to improve the visibility of the colors. The background is always printed in white and the grid in black.
Page 654 ® Data Management R&S Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings 3. Select the "Printer" tool in the toolbar. The "Print Settings" dialog box is displayed. 4. Select "Device 1" to configure the settings for this printing device. 5. In the "Content" tab, select "Print Selected Windows". 6.
Page 655 ® Data Management R&S Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings b) Use the zoom functions to make sure all relevant parts of the result display are visible. 18. Select "Print" to execute the print function. The selected data elements are stored to the file as configured. User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─...
Page 656: General Instrument Setup
® General Instrument Setup R&S Alignment 12 General Instrument Setup Access: [SETUP] Some basic instrument settings can be configured independently of the selected oper- ating mode or application. Usually, you will configure most of these settings initially when you set up the instrument according to your personal preferences or require- ments and then only adapt individual settings to special circumstances when neces- sary.
Page 657 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Alignment During instrument start, the firmware checks whether the installed hardware is suppor- ted. If not, an error message is displayed ("Wrong Firmware Version") and you are asked to update the firmware. Until the firmware version is updated, self-alignment fails.
Page 658: Alignment Settings
® General Instrument Setup R&S Alignment ● If you notice that touching a specific point on the screen does not achieve the cor- rect response ● If the position of the instrument has been changed and you cannot look straight on the screen ●...
Page 659 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Alignment Self-alignment results in secure user mode Be sure to store self-alignment results before SecureUser Mode is enabled; see Chap- ter 5.1.7, "Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode", on page 43. In secure user mode, the results are not stored permanently. Thus, if the currently stored self-alignment results are not suitable, you must perform a self-alignment each time you switch on the R&S FSW.
Page 660 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Alignment Note: If you start a self-alignment remotely, then select the "Local" softkey while the alignment is still running, the instrument only returns to the manual operation state after the alignment is completed. In this case, you cannot abort a self-alignment man- ually.
Page 661: How To Perform A Self-Test
® General Instrument Setup R&S Alignment 12.1.3 How to Perform a Self-Test You do not have to repeat the self-test every time you switch on the instrument. It is only necessary when instrument malfunction is suspected. Operating temperature Before performing this functional test, make sure that the instrument has reached its operating temperature (for details, refer to the data sheet).
Page 662: How To Align The Touchscreen
® General Instrument Setup R&S Display Settings 12.1.5 How to Align the Touchscreen To align the touchscreen 1. Press the [Setup] key. 2. Select the "Alignment" softkey. 3. Select "Touch Screen Alignment". A blinking cross appears in the lower left corner of the screen. 4.
Page 663 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Display Settings Deactivating and Activating the Touchscreen............. 663 Display Update Rate....................663 Set Date and Time...................... 663 Date and Time Format....................664 Deactivating and Activating the Touchscreen The touchscreen function can be deactivated, e.g. when the instrument is being used for demonstration purposes and tapping the screen must not provoke an action.
Page 664 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Display Settings Date and Time Format Switches the time and date display on the screen between US and German (DE) for- mat. Remote command: on page 1291 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TIME:FORMat 12.2.1.2 Displayed Items Access: [Setup] > "Display" > "Displayed Items" Several elements on the screen display can be hidden or shown as required, for exam- ple to enlarge the display area for the measurement results.
Page 665 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Display Settings Date and Time......................665 Front Panel........................666 Mini Front Panel......................666 Toolbar The toolbar provides access to frequently used functions via icons at the top of the screen. Some functions, such as zooming, finding help, printing screenshots or storing and loading files are not accessible at all without the toolbar.
Page 666 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Display Settings You can set the current date and time and configure the display format in the "General" tab of the "Display" dialog box. Remote command: on page 1290 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TIME Front Panel The "Front Panel" display simulates the entire front panel of the device (except for the external connectors) on the screen.
Page 667 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Display Settings Note: You can also activate the mini front panel using the key combination [ALT + m] (be aware of the keyboard language defined in the operating system!). That is useful when you are working from a remote PC and the front panel function is not active. Remote command: on page 1291 SYSTem:DISPlay:FPANel[:STATe]...
Page 668 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Display Settings Theme......................... 668 Screen Colors......................668 Print Colors......................... 668 Showing Print Colors on Display.................669 Modifying User-Defined Color Assignments............... 669 └ Selecting the Object..................670 └ Predefined Colors..................670 └ Preview......................670 Defining User-specific Colors..................671 Restoring the User Settings to Default Colors............
Page 669 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Display Settings In addition to the predefined settings, a user-defined color set can be configured (see "Defining User-specific Colors" on page 671). If "Show Print Colors on Display" is activated, the currently selected print colors are displayed as a preview for your selection.
Page 670 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Display Settings Selecting the Object ← Modifying User-Defined Color Assignments Selects the object for which the color is to be defined. Colors can be defined for the following objects: ● Background ● Grid ● Individual traces ●...
Page 671 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Display Settings Defining User-specific Colors In addition to the colors in the predefined color set you can configure a user-specific color to be used for the selected object. When you select "Userdefined Colors...", the set of predefined colors is replaced by a color palette and color configuration settings.
Page 672 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Display Settings 12.2.1.4 External Monitor Settings Access: [Setup] > "Display" > "Configure Monitor" You can connect an external monitor (or projector) to the DVI or display port connector on the instrument's rear panel (see the R&S FSW getting started manual). Screen resolution and format The touchscreen of the R&S FSW is calibrated for a 16:10 format.
Page 673: How To Configure The Colors For Display And Printing
® General Instrument Setup R&S Display Settings These options concern the behavior of the firmware for touch gestures on the screen. Note that these settings remain unchanged after a channel preset. Level Lock........................673 X-Lock......................... 673 Y-Lock......................... 673 Adapt Measurement to Zoom (selected diagram)............673 Level Lock If activated (default), the reference level (and thus the attenuation) is locked, that is:...
Page 674: How To Work With The Soft Front Panels
® General Instrument Setup R&S Display Settings 2. Select the "Theme + Color" tab. 3. In the "Screen Colors" area, do one of the following: ● Select a predefined set of colors for screen display. ● Select "User Defined Colors" to configure the color set yourself. 4.
Page 675: Transducers
® General Instrument Setup R&S Transducers To activate a key, select the key on the touchscreen. To simulate the use of the rotary knob, use the additional keys displayed between the keypad and the arrow keys: Icon Function Turn left Enter Turn right Mini front panel...
Page 676 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Transducers ues are calculated again. If several measured values are combined in one point, only one value is taken into consideration. If the active transducer line is not defined for the entire sweep range, the missing values are replaced by zeroes. When a transducer is used, the trace is shifted by a calculated factor.
Page 677: Transducer Settings
® General Instrument Setup R&S Transducers Validity The transducer factors must comply with the following rules to ensure correct opera- tion: ● The frequencies for the data points must always be defined in ascending order. Otherwise the entry will not be accepted and an error message is displayed. ●...
Page 678 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Transducers Stored transducer settings When storing and recalling transducer settings, consider the information provided in "Saving and recalling transducer and limit line settings" on page 626. ● Transducer Management..................678 ● Transducer Factors....................680 12.3.2.1 Transducer Management Access: [Setup] >...
Page 679 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Transducers Name...........................679 Unit..........................679 Compatibility........................679 Activating / Deactivating....................679 Comment........................679 Included Transducer Lines in Overview (View Filter)..........680 Adjust Ref Level......................680 Create New Line......................680 Edit Line........................680 Copy Line........................680 Delete Line........................680 Name The name of the stored transducer line. Unit The unit in which the y-values of the data points of the transducer line are defined.
Page 680 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Transducers Included Transducer Lines in Overview (View Filter) Defines which of the stored transducer lines are included in the overview. The view can be restricted to compatible transducer lines only or include all transducer lines found. Whether a line is compatible or not is indicated in the Compatibility setting.
Page 681 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Transducers Name...........................681 Comment........................681 Unit..........................682 X-Axis Scaling......................682 Data Points........................682 Insert Value......................... 682 Delete Value........................682 Shift x.......................... 682 Shift y.......................... 682 Save..........................682 Import.......................... 683 └ File Explorer....................683 Export..........................683 └ File Explorer....................683 Name Defines the transducer line name. All names must be compatible with the Windows 10 conventions for file names.
Page 682 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Transducers Unit The unit in which the y-values of the data points of the transducer line are defined. As soon as a transducer is activated, the unit of the transducer is automatically used for all the level settings and outputs. The unit cannot be changed in the amplitude set- tings unless dB is used.
Page 683: Reference: Transducer Factor File Format
® General Instrument Setup R&S Transducers Import Opens a file selection dialog box and loads the transducer factor from the selected file in .CSV format. Note that a valid import file must contain a minimum of required information for the R&S FSW.
Page 684: How To Configure The Transducer
® General Instrument Setup R&S Transducers Table 12-1: ASCII file format for transducer factor files File contents Description Header data sep=; Separator for individual values (required by Microsoft Excel, for example) Type;RS_TransducerFactor; Type of data FileFormatVersion;1.00; File format version Date;01.Oct 2006; Date of data set storage OptionID;SpectrumAnalyzer Application the transducer factor was created for...
Page 685 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Transducers ● "How to configure a new transducer line" on page 686 ● "How to move the transducer line vertically or horizontally" on page 687 How to find compatible transducer lines ► In the "Transducer" dialog box, select the "View Filter" option: "Show Compatible". All transducer lines stored on the instrument that are compatible to the current measurement settings are displayed in the overview.
Page 686 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Transducers 4. Edit the line configuration as described in "How to configure a new transducer line" on page 686. 5. Save the new configuration by selecting the "Save" button. The new transducer line is displayed in the overview and can be activated. How to delete an existing transducer line 1.
Page 687 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Transducers How to move the transducer line vertically or horizontally A configured transducer line can easily be moved vertically or horizontally. Thus, a new transducer line can be easily generated based upon an existing transducer line which has been shifted.
Page 688: Frequency Response Correction (R&S Fsw-K544)
® General Instrument Setup R&S Frequency Response Correction (R&S FSW-K544) You are asked whether you would like to save the current configuration on the R&S FSW first. 4. Select the file name of the transducer factor. 5. Select the decimal separator that was used in the file. 6.
Page 689 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Frequency Response Correction (R&S FSW-K544) Transducer vs filter function Touchstone files are handled similarly to transducer files by the R&S FSW. However, while a transducer adapts the frequency values by a fixed factor, Touchstone files act as a filter on I/Q input data.
Page 690 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Frequency Response Correction (R&S FSW-K544) Correcting data in one or more applications While transducer files are always used for all measurements on the instrument, .snp and .fres files can be configured either for the current application only, or for all mea- surement channels.
Page 691: User-Defined Frequency Response Correction Settings
® General Instrument Setup R&S Frequency Response Correction (R&S FSW-K544) Imported I/Q data Correction factors are not applied to input from I/Q data files during import. Data from these files is imported as it was stored. However, if any correction factors were applied to the stored data, for example from Touchstone files, the imported data contains those corrections.
Page 692 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Frequency Response Correction (R&S FSW-K544) Save Settings......................693 Clear Settings......................693 Touchstone File Information..................694 └ ID........................694 └ Filename....................... 694 └ Active......................694 └ To - From.......................694 Add Touchstone File....................694 Remove File........................ 694 Move File Up or Down....................695 Frequency Response active..................695...
Page 693 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Frequency Response Correction (R&S FSW-K544) An active external preamplifier is also included in the calculation of the combined user- defined frequency response correction filter and displayed in the preview for SnP files (see "Preview" on page 696). When disabled, no compensation is performed even if an external preamplifier remains connected.
Page 694 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Frequency Response Correction (R&S FSW-K544) Touchstone File Information Provides information on loaded Touchstone files and the order of their application. If an external preamplifier is active, it is also incldued at the bottom of the list. ID ←...
Page 695 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Frequency Response Correction (R&S FSW-K544) Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:REMove on page 1284 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:CLEar on page 1280 Move File Up or Down Moves the selected Touchstone file one position up or down in the list of files, changing the order in which the correction data is applied.
Page 696 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Frequency Response Correction (R&S FSW-K544) Add Freq Resp File Loads a frequency response (.fres) file to the current configuration. The maximum number of files per configuration is 15. The default directory for .fres files is C:\R_S\INSTR\USER\Fresponse. Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:INSert on page 1275...
Page 697 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Frequency Response Correction (R&S FSW-K544) Figure 12-1: Preview of selected user correction file Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:DATA:FREQuency? on page 1274 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:DATA:MAGNitude? on page 1274 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:FLISt<fli>:DATA:PHASe? on page 1274 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:DATA: on page 1281 FREQuency<spi>? [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:DATA: on page 1281 MAGNitude<spi>? [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SLISt<sli>:DATA: on page 1281...
Page 698 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Frequency Response Correction (R&S FSW-K544) Figure 12-2: IQ Mode preview of user correction files Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:IQ:DATA:FREQuency? on page 1278 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:IQ:DATA:MAGNitude? on page 1278 on page 1278 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:IQ:DATA:PHASe? Spectrum Mode ← Preview The preview in Spectrum Mode indicates the frequency ranges covered by the individ- ual correction files.
Page 699: Reference Frequency Settings
® General Instrument Setup R&S Reference Frequency Settings Figure 12-3: Spectrum Mode preview of user correction files Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SPECtrum:DATA:FREQuency? on page 1286 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SPECtrum:DATA:MAGNitude? on page 1286 [SENSe:]CORRection:FRESponse<si>:USER:SPECtrum:DATA:PHASe? on page 1286 12.5 Reference Frequency Settings Access: [Setup] > "Reference" User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 43...
Page 700 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Reference Frequency Settings Reference Frequency Input..................700 └ Behavior in case of missing external reference..........701 └ Tuning Range....................702 └ Frequency..................... 702 └ Loop Bandwidth.................... 702 Reference Frequency Output..................702 Resetting the Default Values..................702 Reference Frequency Input The R&S FSW can use the internal reference source or an external reference source as the frequency standard for all internal oscillators.
Page 701 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Reference Frequency Settings The default setting is the internal reference. When an external reference is used, EXT REF is displayed in the status bar. The following reference inputs are available: Table 12-2: Available Reference Frequency Input Setting Source Connector Frequency Tuning...
Page 702 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Reference Frequency Settings Tuning Range ← Reference Frequency Input The tuning range is only available for the variable external reference frequency. It determines how far the frequency may deviate from the defined level in parts per mil- lion (10 "+/- 0.5 ppm"...
Page 703: System Configuration Settings
® General Instrument Setup R&S System Configuration Settings When you switch the input source, the previously defined settings are restored. You can restore the default values for all input sources using the "Preset Channel" function. 12.6 System Configuration Settings Access: [Setup] > "System Configuration" ●...
Page 704: Information On Versions And Options
® General Instrument Setup R&S System Configuration Settings 12.6.2 Information on Versions and Options Access: [Setup] > "System Configuration" > "Versions + Options" Information on the firmware version and options installed on your instrument is provi- ded. The unique Rohde & Schwarz device ID is also indicated here, as it is required for license and option administration.
Page 705: System Messages
® General Instrument Setup R&S System Configuration Settings For details on options refer to the "Getting Started" manual, "Checking the Supplied Items". Remote commands: on page 1306 SYSTem:FORMat:IDENt on page 1302 DIAGnostic:SERVice:BIOSinfo? on page 1303 DIAGnostic:SERVice:VERSinfo? Open Source Acknowledgment: Open Displays a PDF file containing information on open source code used by the R&S FSW firmware.
Page 706: Firmware Updates
® General Instrument Setup R&S System Configuration Settings If the number of error messages exceeds the capacity of the error buffer, "Message Buffer Overflow" is displayed. To clear the message buffer use the "Clear All Mes- sages" button. The following information is available: device-specific error code Message brief description of the message...
Page 707 ® General Instrument Setup R&S System Configuration Settings tive or check the Rohde&Schwarz website for availability of firmware updates. A firm- ware update package includes at least a setup file and release notes. Before updating the firmware on your instrument, read the release notes delivered with the firmware version.
Page 708: General Configuration Settings
® General Instrument Setup R&S System Configuration Settings If a measurement is running, stop it by pressing the highlighted [Run Cont] or [Run Single] key. 3. Select the [Setup] key. 4. Select the "System Config" softkey. 5. Select the "Firmware Update" tab. 6.
Page 709 ® General Instrument Setup R&S System Configuration Settings Preset Mode The presettings can be defined in the "Config" tab of the "System Configuration" dialog box. "SAN" Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode "MSRA" Multi-Standard Radio Analysis mode "MSRT" Multi-Standard Real-Time mode Remote command: on page 1306 SYSTem:PRESet:COMPatible...
Page 710: Signal Generator Settings
® General Instrument Setup R&S System Configuration Settings To save the new password, select "Save". The password dialog for the next user is dis- played, until you have been prompted to change the password all user accounts. If you cancel the dialog without changing the password, the password dialog for the next user is displayed, until you have been prompted to change the password all user accounts.
Page 711 ® General Instrument Setup R&S System Configuration Settings IP Address or Computer name of Signal Generator............711 └ 123/ABC......................711 └ Password...................... 711 Test Connection......................711 Connect/Disconnect....................712 View Signal Generator....................712 IP Address or Computer name of Signal Generator The IP address or computer name of the signal generator connected to the R&S FSW via LAN.
Page 712: Service Functions
® General Instrument Setup R&S Service Functions ● Connection state Remote command: on page 1307 CONFigure:GENerator:CONNection:CSTate? on page 1308 CONFigure:GENerator:CONNection[:STATe] Connect/Disconnect The R&S FSW attempts to establish a connection to the signal generator, or discon- nects it. If an instrument is connected, the following information is displayed: ●...
Page 713 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Service Functions Create R&S Support Information................713 Save Device Footprint....................713 Create R&S Support Information Creates a *.zip file with important support information. The *.zip file contains the sys- tem configuration information ("Device Footprint"), the current eeprom data and a screenshot of the screen display.
Page 714: Self-Test Settings And Results
® General Instrument Setup R&S Service Functions 12.7.2 Self-test Settings and Results Access: [Setup] > "Service" > "Selftest" If the R&S FSW fails you can perform a self-test of the instrument to identify any defec- tive modules. Once the self-test is started, all modules are checked consecutively and the test result is displayed.
Page 715 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Service Functions NONE..........................715 Calibration Frequency RF................... 715 └ Spectrum.......................715 └ Frequency..................... 716 Calibration Frequency MW..................716 Calibration Analog Baseband..................716 └ Calibration Signal Type................. 716 NONE Uses the current RF signal at the input, i.e. no calibration signal (default). Remote command: on page 1266 DIAGnostic:SERVice:INPut[:SELect]...
Page 716: Service Functions
® General Instrument Setup R&S Service Functions Frequency ← Calibration Frequency RF Defines the frequency of the internal broadband calibration signal to be used for IF fil- ter calibration (max. 64 MHz). For narrowband signals, 64 MHz is sent. Calibration Frequency MW Uses the microwave calibration signal as the RF input (for frequencies higher than 8 GHz).
Page 717 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Service Functions Service Function......................717 Send..........................717 Numeric Mode......................717 Clear History....................... 717 Password........................717 Clear Results.......................718 Save Results....................... 718 Result List........................718 Service Function Selects the service function by its numeric code or textual name. The selection list includes all functions previously selected (since the last "Clear His- tory"...
Page 718: Hardware Diagnostics
® General Instrument Setup R&S Service Functions "Reset Password" clears any previously entered password and returns to the most restrictive service level. Remote command: on page 1310 SYSTem:PASSword[:CENable] on page 1310 SYSTem:PASSword:RESet Clear Results Clears the result display for all previously performed service functions. Remote command: on page 1309 DIAGnostic:SERVice:SFUNction:RESults:DELete...
Page 719: Synchronizing Measurement Channel Configuration
® General Instrument Setup R&S Synchronizing Measurement Channel Configuration Relays Cycle Counter The hardware relays built into the R&S FSW may fail after a large number of switching cycles (see data sheet). The counter indicates how many switching cycles the individ- ual relays have performed since they were installed.
Page 720 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Synchronizing Measurement Channel Configuration When you couple a parameter across all active measurement channels, a change in the currently selected application is passed on to all other active measurement chan- nels. In MSRA mode, the data is captured by the MSRA master only. Thus, parameter cou- pling is not available for data acquisition parameters.
Page 721 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Synchronizing Measurement Channel Configuration "Start / Stop Frequency" Synchronizes the start and stop frequencies for measurements in the frequency domain Note: The start and stop frequencies can automatically change when you change another frequency parameter (such as center frequency or span).
Page 722: User-Defined Parameter Coupling
® General Instrument Setup R&S Synchronizing Measurement Channel Configuration "AC DC Coupling" Synchronizes the Input Coupling Remote command: on page 1312 INSTrument:COUPle:ACDC "Impedance" Synchronizes the impedance for RF input Remote command: on page 1314 INSTrument:COUPle:IMPedance "Analog Baseband Impedance" Synchronizes the impedance for analog baseband input Remote command: on page 1311 INSTrument:COUPle:ABIMpedance...
Page 723 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Synchronizing Measurement Channel Configuration Example: You currently run two instances of the Spectrum application, two instances of the VSA application, and one instance of the Analog Demodulation application. You can synchronize only the first instance of the Spectrum application with the first instance of the VSA application, while the other three channels remain independent.
Page 724 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Synchronizing Measurement Channel Configuration Parameter 1 / Parameter 2 The coupled parameters, markers, or lines. Remote command: on page 1321 INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:NEW? State Enables or disables the coupling. Remote command: on page 1324 INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:STATe Direction Determines which parameter controls the other. "<-"...
Page 725 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Synchronizing Measurement Channel Configuration Remote command: on page 1321 INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:NEW? Category ← Add New User Coupling Selects the category of parameters to be displayed in the Coupling Element 1 / Cou- pling Element 2 selection list. Channel 1 / Channel 2 ←...
Page 726: How To Synchronize Parameters
® General Instrument Setup R&S Synchronizing Measurement Channel Configuration Remote command: on page 1319 INSTrument:COUPle:USER<uc>:ELEMent:LIST? Couple Selected Parameters ← Add New User Coupling Closes the dialog box and adds the new user-defined coupling definition to the list. 12.8.3 How to Synchronize Parameters Access: [SETUP] >...
Page 727: Example For A User-Defined Parameter Coupling
® General Instrument Setup R&S Synchronizing Measurement Channel Configuration b) Select the parameter to which the first parameter is coupled from the "Coupling Element 2" list. c) For Analog Demodulation channels and frequency markers only, select the individual windows (in the frequency domain) from the second Analog Demodu- lation channel to couple.
Page 728 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Synchronizing Measurement Channel Configuration Synchronizing all Spectrum channels The following example demonstrates how to synchronize the center frequency in all Spectrum application channels, while the VSA and Analog Demodulation applications remain independent. 1. Select the [SETUP] key. 2.
Page 729 ® General Instrument Setup R&S Synchronizing Measurement Channel Configuration Synchronizing markers in Analog Demodulation windows Now you have two Analog Demodulation channels. AnaDemod1 has an FM Spectrum and an FM Time Domain window. AnaDemod2 has an RF Spectrum and an RF Time Domain window.
Page 730: Network And Remote Operation
® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics 13 Network and Remote Operation In addition to working with the R&S FSW interactively, located directly at the instru- ment, it is also possible to operate and control it from a remote PC. Various methods for remote control are supported: ●...
Page 731 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Table 13-1: Remote control interfaces and protocols Interface Remarks Protocols, VISA address string ● Local Area HiSLIP High-Speed LAN Instrument Protocol (IVI-6.1) A LAN connector is located on the TCPIP::host address::hislip0[::INSTR] Network rear panel of the instrument.
Page 732 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics VISA library Instrument access is usually achieved from high level programming platforms using VISA as an intermediate abstraction layer. VISA encapsulates the low level VXI, GPIB, LAN or USB function calls and thus makes the transport interface transparent for the user.
Page 733 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics For details on configuring the LAN connection, see Chapter 13.6.1, "How to Configure Network", on page 797. ● VXI-11 Protocol..................... 733 ● HiSLIP Protocol.....................733 ● Socket Communication..................733 ● LXI Web Browser Interface...................
Page 734 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics The simplest way to establish socket communication is to use the built-in telnet pro- gram. The telnet program is part of every operating system and supports a communi- cation with the software on a command-by-command basis. For more convenience and to enable automation by means of programs, user-defined sockets can be program- med.
Page 735 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics The navigation pane of the browser interface contains the following elements: ● "LXI" – "Home" opens the instrument home page. The home page displays the device information required by the LXI standard, including the VISA resource string in read-only format.
Page 736 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics – "File Upload" uploads files to the instrument. (See Chapter 13.6.5, "How to Control the R&S FSW via the Web Browser Inter- face", on page 807.) ● "License Manager" – "License Manager" allows you to install or uninstall license keys and to acti- vate, register or unregister licenses.
Page 737 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Figure 13-1: Communication lines used by the GPIB interface User Manual 1173.9411.02 ─ 43...
Page 738 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Universal Commands Universal commands are encoded in the range 10 through 1F hex. They affect all instruments connected to the bus and do not require addressing. Command Effect on the instrument DCL (Device Clear) Aborts the processing of the commands just received and sets the com- mand processing software to a defined initial state.
Page 739: Scpi (Standard Commands For Programmable Instruments)
® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics USB::<vendor ID>::<product ID>::<serial number>[::INSTR] where: ● <vendor ID> is the vendor ID for Rohde & Schwarz (0x0AAD) ● <product ID> is the product ID for the Rohde & Schwarz instrument ● <serial number>...
Page 740: Messages
® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics ● An appropriately defined VISA alias (short name). A VISA installation is a prerequisite for remote control using the following interfaces: ● Chapter 13.1.1.2, "GPIB Interface (IEC 625/IEEE 418 Bus Interface)", on page 736 ●...
Page 741: Scpi Command Structure
® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics "SCPI confirmed" in the command reference chapters. Commands without this SCPI label are device-specific; however, their syntax follows SCPI rules as per- mitted by the standard. Instrument responses Instrument responses (response messages and service requests) are messages the instrument sends to the controller after a query.
Page 742 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics 13.1.5.2 Syntax for Device-Specific Commands Not all commands used in the following examples are necessarily implemented in the instrument. For demonstration purposes only, assume the existence of the following commands for this section: ●...
Page 743 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Example: Definition: HCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:QUADrant[<N>] Command: HCOP:PAGE:DIM:QUAD2 This command refers to the quadrant 2. Different numbering in remote control For remote control, the suffix may differ from the number of the corresponding selec- tion used in manual operation.
Page 744 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics ● Numeric Values..................... 744 ● Special Numeric Values..................744 ● Boolean Parameters..................... 745 ● Text Parameters....................745 ● Character Strings....................745 ● Block Data......................746 Numeric Values Numeric values can be entered in any form, i.e. with sign, decimal point and exponent. Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down.
Page 745 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics ● INF and NINF: INFinity and negative INFinity (NINF) represent the numeric values 9.9E37 or -9.9E37, respectively. INF and NINF are only sent as instrument respon- ses. ● NAN: Not A Number (NAN) represents the value 9.91E37. NAN is only sent as a instrument response.
Page 746 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Example: HCOP:ITEM:LABel "Test1" HCOP:ITEM:LABel 'Test1' Block Data Block data is a format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data. For example, a command using a block data parameter has the following structure: FORMat:READings:DATA #45168xxxxxxxx The ASCII character # introduces the data block.
Page 747 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Table 13-5: Special characters Parameters A vertical stroke in parameter definitions indicates alternative possibilities in the sense of "or". The effect of the command differs, depending on which parameter is used. Example: Definition:HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation LANDscape | PORTrait Command HCOP:PAGE:ORI LAND specifies landscape orientation...
Page 748 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Example: HCOP:ITEM ALL;:HCOP:IMM This command line contains two commands. Both commands are part of the HCOP command system, i.e. they have one level in common. If the successive commands belong to the same system, having one or several levels in common, the command line can be abbreviated.
Page 749: Command Sequence And Synchronization
® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics 13.1.6 Command Sequence and Synchronization IEEE 488.2 defines a distinction between overlapped and sequential commands: ● A sequential command is one which finishes executing before the next command starts executing. Commands that are processed quickly are usually implemented as sequential commands.
Page 750 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Example: Overlapping command with *OPC The instrument implements INITiate[:IMMediate] as an overlapped command. Assuming that INITiate[:IMMediate] takes longer to execute than *OPC, sending the following command sequence results in initiating a sweep and, after some time, setting the OPC bit in the ESR: INIT;...
Page 751: Status Reporting System
® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics 4. Wait for a service request. The service request indicates that the overlapped command has finished. *OPC? with a service request 1. Set bit no. 4 in the SRE: *SRE 16 to enable MAV service request. 2.
Page 752 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics not used not used not used & logic AND not used of all bits logic OR one register for each channel Range completed Multi-Standard Capture Finish HCOPy in progress GAP ACLR FAIL LMARgin 8 FAIL CACLR FAIL LIMit 8 FAIL...
Page 753 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics ● IST, PPE The IST flag ("Individual STatus"), like the SRQ, combines the entire instrument status in a single bit. The PPE fulfills the same function for the IST flag as the SRE for the service request.
Page 754 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics part can only be read, but not written into or cleared. Its contents are not affected by reading. ● PTRansition / NTRansition The two transition register parts define which state transition of the CONDition part (none, 0 to 1, 1 to 0 or both) is stored in the EVENt part.
Page 755 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics STATus:QUEStionable:DIQ register The STATus:QUEStionable:DIQ register is used for digital I/Q data from the optional Digital Baseband Interface and is described in the R&S FSW I/Q Analyzer and I/Q Input User Manual. STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC register The STATus:QUEStionable:SYNC register is used by the R&S FSW applications and is described in the individual sections (manuals) for each application.
Page 756 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Table 13-7: Meaning of the bits used in the status byte Bit No. Meaning 0...1 Not used Error Queue not empty The bit is set when an entry is made in the error queue. If this bit is enabled by the SRE, each entry of the error queue generates a service request.
Page 757 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Table 13-8: Meaning of the bits used in the event status register Bit No. Meaning Operation Complete This bit is set on receipt of the command *OPC exactly when all previous commands have been executed.
Page 758 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Bit No. Meaning MEASuring Measurement is being performed in base unit (applications are not considered); identical to bit 3 In applications, this bit is not used. Waiting for TRIgger Instrument is ready to trigger and waiting for trigger signal. Not used HardCOPy in progress This bit is set while the instrument is printing a hardcopy.
Page 759 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Table 13-10: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable register Bit No. Meaning "EXTended" This bit indicates further status information not covered by the other status registers in any of the active channels.
Page 760 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit Register The STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit register contains information about the results of a limit check during ACLR measurements. A separate ACPLimit register exists for each active channel. You can read out the register with STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:CONDition? STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit[:EVENt]? Table 13-11: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit register...
Page 761 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Table 13-12: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended register Bit No. Meaning not used INFO This bit is set if a status message is available for the application. Which type of message occurred is indicated in the STATus:QUEStionable:EXTended:INFO Register.
Page 762 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics You can read out the register with STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency: or STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency[:EVENt]?. CONDition? Table 13-14: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency register Bit No. Meaning OVEN COLD This bit is set if the reference oscillator has not yet attained its operating temperature. "OCXO" is displayed.
Page 763 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Bit No. Meaning LIMit 8 FAIL This bit is set if limit line 8 is violated. 8 to 14 Unused This bit is always 0. STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin Register This register contains information about the observance of limit margins. A separate LMARgin register exists for each active channel and for each window.
Page 764 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Table 13-17: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:POWer register Bit No. Meaning OVERload This bit is set if an overload occurs at the RF input, causing signal distortion but not yet causing damage to the device.
Page 765 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Table 13-19: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:TIMe register Bit No. Meaning not used Sweep time too low This bit is set if the sweep time is too low. 2 to 14 Unused This bit is always 0.
Page 766 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics 3. CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "*INIT;*OPC") ' Generate an SRQ after operation complete After its settings have been completed, the instrument generates an SRQ. A detailed example for a service request routine is provided in Chapter 14.15.2, "Ser- vice Request",...
Page 767 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Queries are usually used after an SRQ in order to obtain more detailed information on the cause of the SRQ. Decimal representation of a bit pattern The STB and ESR registers contain 8 bits, the SCPI registers 16 bits. The contents of a status register are specified and transferred as a single decimal number.
Page 768: General Programming Recommendations
® Network and Remote Operation R&S Remote Control Basics Table 13-20: Resetting the status reporting system Event Switching on supply DCL, *RST or STA- *CLS voltage SYS- Tus:PRE- Tem:PRE Power-On-Status- (Device Clear Clear, Selected Device Effect Clear) Clear STB, ESR Clear SRE, ESE Clear PPE Clear EVENt parts of the regis-...
Page 769: Gpib Languages
® Network and Remote Operation R&S GPIB Languages Reacting to malfunctions The service request is the only possibility for the instrument to become active on its own. Each controller program should instruct the instrument to initiate a service request in case of malfunction. The program should react appropriately to the service request.
Page 770 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S GPIB Languages Language Comment 8566B 8568A Command sets A and B are available. Command sets A and B differ in the rules regarding the command structure. 8568A_DC Uses DC input coupling by default if supported by the instrument 8568B Command sets A and B are available.
Page 771: The Iecwin Tool
® Network and Remote Operation R&S The IECWIN Tool Table 13-21: Instrument settings for emulation of 8566A/B, 8568A/B, 8594E; FSEA, FSEB, FSEM; FSEK instruments Model # of Trace Start Freq. Stop Freq. Ref Level Input Coupling Points 8566A/B 1001 2 GHz 22 GHz 0 dBm 8568A/B...
Page 772: Automating Tasks With Remote Command Scripts
® Network and Remote Operation R&S Automating Tasks with Remote Command Scripts ● Generation of a log file For command scripts, IECWIN offers the following features: ● Synchronization with the instrument on every command ● Checking expected result for query commands (as string or numeric value) ●...
Page 773: The Context-Sensitive Scpi Command Menu
® Network and Remote Operation R&S Automating Tasks with Remote Command Scripts instrument supports you by showing the corresponding command syntax for the cur- rent setting value. You can create a SCPI script directly on the instrument at any time of operation, in the following ways: ●...
Page 774 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Automating Tasks with Remote Command Scripts Show SCPI result query commands This menu item is displayed if you selected a result display. All possible commands to query the results in the diagram are displayed. Select the query command you are interested in to display the SCPI command dialog box, as described in "Show SCPI command"...
Page 775: The Scpi Recorder
® Network and Remote Operation R&S Automating Tasks with Remote Command Scripts 13.4.2 The SCPI Recorder Access: Toolbar The SCPI Recorder displays a list of the currently recorded commands and provides functions to create and export a script of SCPI commands. Some additional settings for recording are provided on a separate tab in the dialog box.
Page 776 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Automating Tasks with Remote Command Scripts Recording is stopped when you deactivate "Auto Recording". To continue recording, reactivate "Auto Recording". To start a new SCPI command list, select Clear All before activating "Auto Record- ing".
Page 777 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Automating Tasks with Remote Command Scripts Before storing the file, you can display a "Preview" of the file in the selected format. Currently, the following file formats are supported: "C++" A commonly used general programming language for various applica- tions (*.cpp) "MATLAB A programming environment, frequently used in signal processing...
Page 778 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Automating Tasks with Remote Command Scripts Settings Some additional settings are available to configure the exported SCPI command files. Add Synchronization Commands ← Settings If enabled, additional commands are included in the script to synchronize the recorded commands when necessary.
Page 779: How To Determine The Required Scpi Command
® Network and Remote Operation R&S Automating Tasks with Remote Command Scripts Remote command: on page 1308 CONFigure:GENerator:IPConnection:ADDRess 123/ABC ← IP Address or Computer name of Signal Generator ← Settings By default, the TCPIP address is expected. To enter the computer name, toggle the "123"/"ABC"...
Page 780: How To Create And Export Scpi Scripts
® Network and Remote Operation R&S Automating Tasks with Remote Command Scripts 13.4.4 How to Create and Export SCPI Scripts Using the SCPI Recorder functions, you can create a SCPI script directly on the instru- ment and then export the script for use on the controller. The SCPI Recorder allows you to record SCPI command lists either automatically or manually.
Page 781 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Automating Tasks with Remote Command Scripts How to record SCPI commands manually 1. Determine the required SCPI command as described in Chapter 13.4.3, "How to Determine the Required SCPI Command", on page 779. 2. From the SCPI command dialog box, select "Add SCPI Command to Recording". The command is added to the SCPI Recorder command list.
Page 782: Example For A Recorded Scpi Script
® Network and Remote Operation R&S Automating Tasks with Remote Command Scripts d) From the context menu, select "Paste". 6. Select "Save As" to store the changes to the script. How to check a SCPI script The easiest way to check a script is to execute it, for example in the auxiliary tool IEC- WIN, which is provided with the R&S FSW firmware (see Chapter 13.3, "The IECWIN Tool",...
Page 783: Network And Remote Control Settings
® Network and Remote Operation R&S Network and Remote Control Settings # python script created by FSW: 29:11:2017 09:08:53 import visa # connect to instrument (MU717225) VisaResourceManager = visa.ResourceManager() FSW = VisaResourceManager.open_resource("TCPIP::10.124.0.195::INSTR") # Display update ON FSW.write("SYST:DISP:UPD ON") FSW.write("*RST") FSW.write("INIT:CONT OFF") FSW.write("SENS:FREQ:CENT 850000000") FSW.write("SENS:FREQ:SPAN 4000000") FSW.write("DISP:WIND:SUBW:TRAC:Y:SCAL:RLEV 10")
Page 784: General Network Settings
® Network and Remote Operation R&S Network and Remote Control Settings ● Settings......................793 ● Remote Errors.......................795 ● Returning to Manual Mode ("Local")..............796 13.5.1 General Network Settings Access: [SETUP] > "Network + Remote" > "Network" tab The R&S FSW can be operated in a local area network (LAN), for example to control the instrument from a remote PC or use a network printer.
Page 785 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Network and Remote Control Settings Computer Name......................785 Address........................786 Subnet Mask....................... 786 DHCP.......................... 786 Network Configuration....................786 Computer Name Each instrument is delivered with an assigned computer name, but this name can be changed. The naming conventions of Windows apply. If too many characters and/or numbers are entered, an error message is displayed in the status line.
Page 786: Gpib Settings
® Network and Remote Operation R&S Network and Remote Control Settings IP Address Defines the IP address. The TCP/IP protocol is preinstalled with the IP address 10.0.0.10. If the DHCP server is available ("DHCP On"), the setting is read-only. The IP address consists of four number blocks separated by dots. Each block contains 3 numbers in maximum (e.g.
Page 787 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Network and Remote Control Settings GPIB Address......................787 Identification String......................787 Reset to Factory String....................787 Remote Display Update....................788 GPIB Terminator......................788 *IDN Format........................ 788 Logging........................788 Display Remote Errors....................789 Set Hardware Immediately..................789 GPIB Address Defines the GPIB address.
Page 788 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Network and Remote Control Settings Rohde&Schwarz,FSW,<Unique number> Remote command: on page 1297 SYSTem:IDENtify:FACTory Remote Display Update Defines whether the display of the R&S FSW is updated when changing from manual operation to remote control. Turning off the display update function improves performance during remote control.
Page 789: Compatibility Settings
® Network and Remote Operation R&S Network and Remote Control Settings Logging the commands may be extremely useful for debug purposes, e.g. in order to find misspelled keywords in control programs. Remote command: on page 1330 SYSTem:CLOGging Display Remote Errors Activates and deactivates the display of errors that occur during remote operation of the R&S FSW.
Page 790 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Network and Remote Control Settings Compatibility with former R&S signal and spectrum analyzers As a rule, the R&S FSW supports most commands from previous R&S signal and spectrum analyzers such as the FSQ, FSP, FSU, or FSV. However, the default values, in particular the number of sweep points or particular bandwidths, may vary.
Page 791 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Network and Remote Control Settings As a rule, the R&S FSW supports most commands from previous R&S signal and spectrum analyzers such as the FSQ, FSP, FSU, or FSV. However, the default values, in particular the number of sweep points or particular bandwidths, may vary. Therefore, the R&S FSW can emulate these other devices, including their default values, in order to repeat previous measurements or support existing control applications as in legacy systems.
Page 792 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Network and Remote Control Settings Remote command: on page 1331 SYSTem:HPCoupling Wideband This setting defines which option is returned when the *OPT? query is executed, depending on the state of the wideband option. It is only available for PSA89600 emulation. "Off"...
Page 793: Lxi Settings
® Network and Remote Operation R&S Network and Remote Control Settings 13.5.4 LXI Settings Access: [SETUP] > "Network + Remote" > "LXI" tab On the R&S FSW the LXI Class C functionality is already installed and enabled; thus, the instrument can be accessed via any web browser (e.g. the Microsoft Internet Explorer) to perform the following tasks: ●...
Page 794 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S Network and Remote Control Settings Current LXI Configuration Displays the current LXI information from the R&S FSW (read-only). "Current ver- Current LXI version sion" "LXI Extended Detected LXI features, such as HiSlip (see "HiSLIP Protocol" Features"...
Page 795: Remote Errors
® Network and Remote Operation R&S Network and Remote Control Settings 13.5.5 Remote Errors Access: [SETUP] > "Network + Remote" > "Remote Errors " tab The error messages generated by the R&S FSW during remote operation are dis- played here. The messages are displayed in the order of their occurrence;...
Page 796: Returning To Manual Mode ("Local")
® Network and Remote Operation R&S Network and Remote Control Settings Remote command: on page 1304 SYSTem:ERRor:LIST? Clear Error List Deletes the error message buffer for remote operation. Note: The remote error list is automatically cleared when the R&S FSW is shut down. Remote command: on page 1304 SYSTem:ERRor:CLEar:REMote...
Page 797: How To Set Up A Network And Remote Control
® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control 13.6 How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control Risk of network failure Consult your network administrator before performing the following tasks: ● Connecting the instrument to the network ●...
Page 798 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control Windows Firewall Settings A firewall protects an instrument by preventing unauthorized users from gaining access to it through a network. Rohde & Schwarz highly recommends the use of the firewall on your instrument.
Page 799 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control By default, the instrument is configured to use dynamic TCP/IP configuration and obtain all address information automatically. This means that it is safe to establish a physical connection to the LAN without any previous instrument configuration.
Page 800 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control 7. Close the dialog box. If you have entered an invalid IP address or subnet mask, the message "out of range" is displayed in the status line. If the settings are correct, the configuration is saved, and you are prompted to restart the instrument.
Page 801 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control 13.6.1.3 How to Change the Instrument Name In a LAN that uses a DNS server (Domain Name System server), each PC or instru- ment connected in the LAN can be accessed via an unambiguous computer name instead of the IP address.
Page 802 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control The instrument home page displays the device information required by the LXI stan- dard including the VISA resource string in read-only format. ► Press the "Device Indicator" button on the "Instrument Home Page" to activate or deactivate the LXI status icon on the status bar of the R&S FSW.
Page 803 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control ● "Ping Client" provides the ping utility to verify the connection between the instru- ment and other devices. IP Configuration The "LAN Configuration > IP configuration" web page displays all mandatory LAN parameters and allows their modification.
Page 804: How To Operate The Instrument Without A Network
® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control 2. Enter the IP address of the second device without the ping command and with- out any further parameters into the "Destination Address" field (e.g. 10.113.10.203).
Page 805 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control Refer to Chapter 12, "General Instrument Setup", on page 656 to find out which func- tions are affected. At the same time you log on to the operating system, you are automatically logged on to the network.
Page 806: How To Share Directories (Only With Microsoft Networks)
® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control The new password is now active. 13.6.3.3 How to Activate or Deactivate the Automatic Login Mechanism Deactivating the automatic login mechanism When shipped, the instrument is already configured to automatically log on under Win- dows 10.
Page 807: How To Control The R&S Fsw Via The Web Browser Interface
® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control 13.6.5 How to Control the R&S FSW via the Web Browser Interface Via the LXI browser interface to the R&S FSW one or more users can control the instrument remotely from another PC without additional installation.
Page 808: How To Deactivate The Web Browser Interface
® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control The most commonly used folders on the instrument are displayed, for example those that contain user data, as well as the top-most My Computer folder, from which you can access all other folders on the instrument.
Page 809: How To Set Up Remote Desktop
® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control 6. Set "Startup type" to "Disabled". 7. Select "Stop". 8. Select "Apply". The next time a user enters the IP address of the instrument in a web browser, an error message is displayed: Failed to connect to server (code.
Page 810 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control Note: To avoid problems, use a fixed IP address. When a DHCP server is used, a new IP address is assigned each time the instru- ment is restarted.
Page 811 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control 13.6.7.2 How to Configure the Controller Remote Desktop Client With Windows 10, Remote Desktop Client is part of the operating system and can be accessed via "Start > Programs > Accessories > Remote Desktop Connection". For other versions of Windows, Microsoft offers the Remote Desktop Client as an add- Select the "Windows"...
Page 812 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control 6. To improve the performance, you can deactivate the "Desktop background", "Show contents of window while dragging" and "Menu and window animation" options. 7. Open the "Local Resources" tab for enabling printers, local drives and serial inter- faces.
Page 813 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control The options for configuring the R&S FSW screen display are displayed. 11. Under "Remote desktop size", you can set the size of the R&S FSW window on the desktop of the controller.
Page 814 ® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control ● Press the key combination [ALT] + [F4]. ● The R&S FSW firmware is shut down, which may take a few sec- onds. ● On the desktop, double-tap the "Analyzer" icon. The firmware restarts and then automatically opens the "Soft Front Panel", i.e.
Page 815: How To Start A Remote Control Session From A Pc
® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control 2. On the R&S FSW, a user logs on. The connection to the controller is terminated as a result. A message is displayed on the controller display indicating that another user has assumed control of the instrument.
Page 816: How To Return To Manual Operation
® Network and Remote Operation R&S How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control 4. To prevent unintentional return to manual operation, disable the keys of the instru- ment using the universal command LLO. Switching to manual mode is only possible via remote control then. This function is only available for the GPIB interface.
Page 817: Remote Commands
® Remote Commands R&S Conventions Used in SCPI Command Descriptions 14 Remote Commands The commands required to perform measurements in the Spectrum application in a remote environment are described here. It is assumed that the R&S FSW has already been set up for remote operation in a net- work as described in Chapter 13.6, "How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control",...
Page 818: Common Suffixes
® Remote Commands R&S Common Commands Parameters that are only returned as the result of a query are indicated as Return values. ● Conformity Commands that are taken from the SCPI standard are indicated as SCPI con- firmed. All commands used by the R&S FSW follow the SCPI syntax rules. ●...
Page 819 ® Remote Commands R&S Common Commands ..........................820 *IDN? ..........................820 *IST? ..........................820 *OPC ...........................820 *OPT? ..........................821 *PCB ..........................821 *PRE ..........................821 *PSC ..........................822 *RST ..........................822 *SRE ...........................822 *STB? ..........................822 *TRG ........................... 823 *TST? ..........................823 *WAI *CAL? Calibration query...
Page 820 ® Remote Commands R&S Common Commands Returns the contents of the event status register in decimal form and then sets the reg- ister to zero. Return values: <Contents> Range: 0 to 255 Usage: Query only *IDN? Identification Returns the instrument identification. Return values: <ID>...
Page 821 ® Remote Commands R&S Common Commands Queries the options included in the instrument. For a list of all available options and their description, refer to the data sheet. Return values: <Options> The query returns a list of all installed and activated options, separated by commas, where: B<number>...
Page 822 ® Remote Commands R&S Common Commands Resets the status registers. *RST Reset Sets the instrument to a defined default status. The default settings are indicated in the description of commands. The command is equivalent to SYSTem:PRESet. Note that the factory set default values can be modified to user-defined settings (see on page 1238).
Page 823: Selecting The Operating Mode And Application
® Remote Commands R&S Selecting the Operating Mode and Application *TST? Self-test query Initiates self-tests of the instrument and returns an error code. Note: If you start a self-test remotely, then select the "Local" softkey while the test is still running, the instrument only returns to the manual operation state after the test is completed.
Page 824 ® Remote Commands R&S Selecting the Operating Mode and Application ......................827 INSTrument:MODE .....................827 INSTrument:REName ......................828 INSTrument[:SELect] DISPlay:ATAB <State> This command switches between the MultiView tab and the most recently displayed channel. If only one channel is active, this command has no effect. Parameters: <State>...
Page 825 ® Remote Commands R&S Selecting the Operating Mode and Application Example: INST:CRE SAN, 'Spectrum 2' Adds an additional spectrum display named "Spectrum 2". Manual operation: "New Channel" on page 126 INSTrument:CREate:REPLace <ChannelName1>,<ChannelType>,<ChannelName2> This command replaces a channel with another one. Setting parameters: <ChannelName1>...
Page 826 ® Remote Commands R&S Selecting the Operating Mode and Application Return values: <ChannelType>, For each channel, the command returns the channel type and <ChannelName> channel name (see tables below). Tip: to change the channel name, use the INSTrument: command. REName Example: INST:LIST? Result for 3 channels:...
Page 827 ® Remote Commands R&S Selecting the Operating Mode and Application Application <ChannelType> Default Channel name*) parameter OneWeb (R&S FSW-K201) OWEB OneWeb Phase Noise (R&S FSW-K40) PNOISE Phase Noise Pulse (R&S FSW-K6) PULSE Pulse Real-Time Spectrum RTIM Real-Time Spectrum Spurious Measurements (R&S FSW-K50) SPUR Spurious TD-SCDMA BTS (R&S FSW-K76)
Page 828 ® Remote Commands R&S Selecting the Operating Mode and Application Setting parameters: <ChannelName1> String containing the name of the channel you want to rename. <ChannelName2> String containing the new channel name. Note that you cannot assign an existing channel name to a new channel;...
Page 829: Performing A Sequence Of Measurements
® Remote Commands R&S Selecting the Operating Mode and Application Manual operation: "Spectrum" on page 117 "1xEV-DO BTS" on page 118 "1xEV-DO MS" on page 118 "3G FDD BTS" on page 118 "3G FDD UE" on page 118 "5G NR" on page 118 "802.11ad"...
Page 830 ® Remote Commands R&S Selecting the Operating Mode and Application You can start a new sequence any time using INITiate:SEQuencer:IMMediate on page 830. Usage: Event Manual operation: "Sequencer State" on page 129 INITiate:SEQuencer:IMMediate This command starts a new sequence of measurements by the Sequencer. Its effect is similar to the command used for a single INITiate<n>[:IMMediate]...
Page 831: Programming Example: Performing A Sequence Of Measurements
® Remote Commands R&S Selecting the Operating Mode and Application SYSTem:SEQuencer <State> This command turns the Sequencer on and off. The Sequencer must be active before any other Sequencer commands (INIT:SEQ...) are executed, otherwise an error will occur. A detailed programming example is provided in Chapter 14.4.3, "Programming Exam- ple: Performing a Sequence of Measurements",...
Page 832 ® Remote Commands R&S Selecting the Operating Mode and Application //Switch to single sweep mode INIT:CONT OFF //switch back to first (default) analyzer channel INST:SEL 'Spectrum';*WAI //Switch into SEM SENSe:SWEep:MODE ESPectrum //Load Sem standard file for W-CDMA SENSe:ESPectrum:PRESet:STANdard 'WCDMA\3GPP\DL\3GPP_DL.xml' //Set sweep count in Spectrum channel SENS:SWEEP:COUNT 5 //----------Creating a second measurement channel ---------------- //Create second IQ channel...
Page 833: Configuring And Performing Measurements
® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements //Switch into first IQ channel to get results INST:SEL 'IQ 1';*WAI CALCulate:MARKer:MAXimum CALC:MARK:Y? //Change sweep time in IQ SENS:SWE:TIME 300us //Switch to single Sequencer mode INITiate:SEQuencer:MODE SINGle //Sweep all channels once, taking the sweep count in each channel into account INITiate:SEQuencer:IMMediate;*OPC? //Set marker to maximum in IQ1 and query result CALCulate:MARKer:MAXimum...
Page 834: Performing Measurements
® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements 14.5.1 Performing Measurements Useful commands for performing measurements described elsewhere ● on page 919 INITiate<n>:ESPectrum ● on page 953 INITiate<n>:SPURious Remote commands exclusive for performing measurements: .......................... 834 ABORt ....................835 INITiate<n>:CONMeas ....................
Page 835 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements INITiate<n>:CONMeas This command restarts a (single) measurement that has been stopped (using ABORt) or finished in single sweep mode. The measurement is restarted at the beginning, not where the previous measurement was stopped. As opposed to INITiate<n>[:IMMediate], this command does not reset traces in maxhold, minhold or average mode.
Page 836 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Example: INIT:CONT OFF Switches the sweep mode to single sweep. INIT:CONT ON Switches the sweep mode to continuous sweep. Manual operation: "Frequency Sweep" on page 133 "Zero Span" on page 133 "Continuous Sweep / Run Cont" on page 472 INITiate<n>[:IMMediate] This command starts a (single) new measurement.
Page 837: Configuring Power Measurements
® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Example: SWE:COUNt 64 Sets sweep count to 64 INIT:CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT Starts a sweep (without waiting for the sweep end!) SWE:COUN:CURR? Queries the number of started sweeps Usage: Query only 14.5.2 Configuring Power Measurements...
Page 838 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Suffix: <n> irrelevant <m> irrelevant <sb> Sub block in a Multi-standard radio measurement; MSR ACLR: 1 to 8 Multi-SEM: 1 to 8 for all other measurements: irrelevant Parameters: <Measurement> ACPower | MCACpower ACLR measurements (also known as adjacent channel power or multicarrier adjacent channel measurements).
Page 839 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements CPOWer Channel power measurements. Returns the channel power. The unit of the return values depends on the scaling of the y-axis: • logarithmic scaling returns the power in the current unit • linear scaling returns the power in W For SEM measurements, the return value is the channel power of the reference range (in the specified sub block).
Page 840 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements OBANdwidth | OBWidth Occupied bandwidth measurement. The R&S FSW performs the measurement on the trace that marker 1 is positioned on. Carrier-to-noise ratio measurement. Carrier-to-noise ratio measurement referenced to 1 Hz band- width Manual operation: "C/N"...
Page 841: Measuring The Channel Power And Aclr
® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements OBANdwidth | OBWidth Occupied bandwidth measurement Carrier to noise ratio Carrier to noise ration referenced to a 1 Hz bandwidth Manual operation: "Optimized Settings (Adjust Settings)" on page 173 "Adjust Settings" on page 211 "Adjust Settings"...
Page 842 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements ● Selecting the Reference Channel................. 850 ● Checking Limits.....................851 ● General ACLR Measurement Settings..............858 ● Configuring MSR ACLR Measurements............... 858 ● Performing an ACLR Measurement..............888 ● Retrieving and Analyzing Measurement Results..........888 ●...
Page 843 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements <sb> Sub block in a Multi-standard radio measurement; MSR ACLR: 1 to 8 Multi-SEM: 1 to 8 for all other measurements: irrelevant Return values: <Standards> List of standard files. Usage: Query only Manual operation: "User Standards"...
Page 844 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements ................844 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs ..............844 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth:ACHannel ............844 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:ACHannel ............844 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth:ALTernate<ch> .............844 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:ALTernate<ch> ............845 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth[:CHANnel<ch>] ............845 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth[:CHANnel<ch>] ..............845 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:ACHannel ............846 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:ALTernate<ch> .............846 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:CHANnel<ch> ............. 846 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing[:ACHannel] ............847 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ALTernate<ch> ............847 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:CHANnel<ch>...
Page 845 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements For MSR signals, this command defines the bandwidth of the lower alternate channels in asymmetrical configurations. To configure the bandwidth for the upper alternate channel, use the com- [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:UALTernate<ch> mand. If you set the channel bandwidth for the first alternate channel, the R&S FSW sets the bandwidth of the other alternate channels to the same value, but not the other way round (not for MSR signals).
Page 846 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Manual operation: "Channel Names" on page 177 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:ALTernate<ch> <Name> This command defines a name for an alternate channel. For MSR ACLR measurements, this command defines the name for the lower alternate channel in asymmetric channel definitions. To define the name for the upper alternate channels use the command.
Page 847 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ALTernate<ch> <Spacing> This command defines the distance from transmission channel to alternate channels. For MSR signals, this command defines the distance from the CF of the first Tx chan- nel in the first sub block to the lower alternate channel. To configure the spacing for the upper alternate channel in asymmetrical configurations, use the [SENSe:]POWer: command.
Page 848 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <Number> Range: 1 to 18 *RST: Manual operation: "Number of channels: Tx, Adj" on page 170 14.5.3.3 Defining Weighting Filters The following commands define weighting filters for ACLR measurements............848 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:ACHannel ...............
Page 849 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Suffix: <ch> 1..n Alternate channel number Parameters: <Alpha> Roll-off factor Range: 0 to 1 *RST: 0.22 Manual operation: "Weighting Filters" on page 176 "Weighting Filters" on page 187 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:CHANnel<ch> <Alpha> This command defines the roll-off factor for the transmission channel weighting filter. Suffix: <ch>...
Page 850 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:ALTernate<ch> <State> This command turns the weighting filter for an alternate channel on and off. For asymmetrical MSR signals, this command turns the weighting filter for the lower alternate channels on and off. To configure the filter state for the upper alternate chan- nels, use the [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:UALTernate<ch>...
Page 851 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:AUTO <RefChannel> This command selects the reference channel for relative measurements. You need at least one channel for the command to work. Parameters: <RefChannel> MINimum | MAXimum | LHIGhest MINimum Transmission channel with the lowest power MAXimum Transmission channel with the highest power LHIGhest...
Page 852 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements ..........856 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>:RESult? ........857 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>[:RELative]:STATe ............... 857 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower[:STATe] CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute <LowerLimit>[, <UpperLimit>] This command defines the absolute limit of the adjacent channels. If you have defined an absolute limit as well as a relative limit, the R&S FSW uses the lower value for the limit check.
Page 853 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative] <LowerLimit>[, <UpperLimit>] This command defines the relative limit of the adjacent channels. The reference value for the relative limit is the measured channel power. If you have defined an absolute limit as well as a relative limit, the R&S FSW uses the lower value for the limit check.
Page 854 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements PASSED Limit check has passed. FAIL Limit check has failed. Example: INIT:IMM;*WAI; CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:RES? PASSED,PASSED Usage: Query only Manual operation: "Limit Check" on page 176 "Limit Checking" on page 188 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative]:STATe This command turns the relative limit check for the adjacent channels on and off. You have to activate the general ACLR limit check before using this command with CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower[:STATe].
Page 855 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <LowerLimit> The limit of the lower adjacent channel. Range: -200 dBm to 200 dBm *RST: -200 dBm Default unit: dBm <UpperLimit> The limit of the upper adjacent channel. Range: -200 dBm to 200 dBm *RST: -200 dBm Default unit: dBm...
Page 856 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <LowerLimit> The limit of the lower alternate channel. Range: 0 dB to 100 dB *RST: 0 dB Default unit: dB <UpperLimit> The limit of the upper alternate channel. Range: 0 dB to 100 dB *RST: 0 dB Default unit: dB...
Page 857 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Usage: Query only CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:ALTernate<ch>[:RELative]:STATe This command turns the relative limit check for the alternate channels on and off. You have to activate the general ACLR limit check before using this command with CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower[:STATe].
Page 858 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements 14.5.3.6 General ACLR Measurement Settings The following commands control the measurement algorithm. Useful commands for the ACLR measurement described elsewhere: ● on page 1041 [SENSe:]POWer:NCORrection ● on page 840 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet ● on page 841 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet:RLEVel ●...
Page 859 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements ● on page 837 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:RESult? ● CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:RESult:PHZ on page 890 ● on page 837 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer<sb>:MODE ● on page 857 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower[:STATe] ● on page 851 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:REFerence:TXCHannel:AUTO ● on page 1041 [SENSe:]POWer:NCORrection ● on page 841 [SENSe:]POWer:TRACe ●...
Page 860 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:SBLock<sb>:CHANnel<ch> <State> This command turns the weighting filter for the specified transmission channel on and off. Suffix: <sb> 1 to 8 sub block number <ch> 1..n Tx channel number Parameters: <State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0 *RST: W-CDMA: 1, other technologies: 0 Manual operation:...
Page 861 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:CENTer[:CHANnel<ch>] <Frequency> This command defines the (absolute) center frequency of the specified MSR Tx chan- nel. Note that the position of the first Tx channel in the first sub block and the last Tx chan- nel in the last sub block also affect the position of the adjacent channels.
Page 862 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Remote commands exclusive to MSR adjacent channel setup: ............862 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:RFBWidth .......862 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:TECHnology[:CHANnel<ch>] ..........863 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:TXCHannel:COUNt .............863 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:UACHannel ............864 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:UALTernate<ch> ................864 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SSETup ...............864 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth:UACHannel ............864 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:UACHannel ............865 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth:UALTernate<ch> ..........865 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:UALTernate<ch> ............865 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:UACHannel ..........865...
Page 863 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Transmission according to GSM standard WCDMa Transmission according to W-CDMA standard LTE_1_40 | LTE_3_00 | LTE_5_00 | LTE_10_00 | LTE_15_00 | LTE_20_00 Transmission according to LTE standard for different channel bandwidths NR5G_fr1_5_00 | NR5G_fr1_10_00 | NR5G_fr1_15_00 | NR5G_fr1_20_00 | NR5G_fr1_25_00 | NR5G_fr1_30_00 | NR5G_fr1_40_00 | NR5G_fr1_50_00 | NR5G_fr1_60_00 | NR5G_fr1_70_00 | NR5G_fr1_80_00 | NR5G_fr1_90_00 |...
Page 864 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <Spacing> Range: 100 Hz to 2000 MHz *RST: 14 kHz Default unit: Hz Manual operation: "Adjacent Channel Spacings" on page 187 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:UALTernate<ch> <Spacing> This command defines the distance from transmission channel to the upper alternate channels.
Page 865 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements The adjacent channel is the first pair of channels next to the transmission channels. To configure the bandwidth for the lower adjacent channel, use the [SENSe:]POWer: command. ACHannel:BANDwidth:ACHannel Steep-edged channel filters are available for fast ACLR measurements. Parameters: <Bandwidth>...
Page 866 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Suffix: <ch> 1..n Alternate channel number Parameters: <Alpha> Roll-off factor Range: 0 to 1 *RST: 0.22 Manual operation: "Weighting Filters" on page 187 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:UACHannel <State> This command turns the weighting filter for the upper adjacent channel on and off for asymmetrical MSR signals.
Page 867 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:AGCHannels <State> This command activates or deactivates gap channels in an MSR signal. For more information see Chapter 7.2.3.4, "Measurement on Multi-Standard Radio (MSR) Signals", on page 162. Parameters: <State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0 ON | 1 The gap channels are displayed and channel power results are calculated and displayed in the Result Summary.
Page 868 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Example: "Example: Configuring and Performing an Asymmetrical MSR ACLR Measurement" on page 895 Manual operation: "Gap Mode" on page 190 Automatic (Symmetrical) Configuration The following commands are only available for symmetrical (automatic) configuration of gap channels (see on page 867).
Page 869 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Suffix: <n> irrelevant <li> irrelevant <gap> 1 | 2 Gap (CACLR) channel number Parameters: <State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0 *RST: Example: CALC:LIM:ACP:GAP1:ABS:STAT ON CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>[:AUTO]:ACLR[:RELative] <Limit>[, <UpperLimit>] This command defines the relative limit for the ACLR power in the specified gap chan- nel.
Page 870 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements <gap> 1 | 2 Gap (CACLR) channel number Parameters: <State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0 *RST: Example: CALC:LIM:ACP:GAP1:ACLR:REL:STAT ON CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>[:AUTO][:CACLr][:RELative] <Limit>, <UpperLimit> This command defines the relative limit of the specified gap (CACLR) channel. The ref- erence value for the relative limit is the measured channel power.
Page 871 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements OFF | 0 Switches the function off ON | 1 Switches the function on Example: CALC:LIM:ACP:GAP1:REL:STAT ON [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth:GAP<gap>[:AUTO] <Bandwidth> [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:GAP<gap>[:AUTO] <Bandwidth> This command defines the bandwidth of the MSR gap (CACLR) channel in all sub block gaps.
Page 872 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Suffix: <gap> 1 | 2 Gap (CACLR) channel number Parameters: <State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0 *RST: Example: SENS:POW:ACH:FILT:GAP2 ON Manual operation: "Weighting Filters" on page 192 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:GAP<gap>[:AUTO]:MSIZe <Bandwidth> If the gap between the sub blocks does not exceed the specified bandwidth, the gap channels are not displayed in the diagram, and the gap channel results are not calcula- ted in the result summary.
Page 873 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <Spacing> numeric value in Hz *RST: 2.5 MHz Default unit: HZ Example: SENS:POW:ACH:SPAC:GAP2 5MHZ Manual operation: "Gap Channel Spacing" on page 191 Manual (Asymmetrical) Configuration The following commands are only available for asymmetrical (manual) configuration of gap channels (see on page 867).
Page 874 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements <gap> 1 | 2 Gap (CACLR) channel number Parameters: <Limit> Defines the absolute limit of the specified gap channel. Default unit: dBm Parameters for setting and query: <SBGaps> AB | BC | CD | DE | EF | FG | GH Name of the gap, defined by the letters of the surrounding sub blocks (e.g.
Page 875 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Example: "Example: Configuring and Performing an Asymmetrical MSR ACLR Measurement" on page 895 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer:ACLR[:RELative] <SBGaps>, <Limit> CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer:ACLR[:RELative]? <SBGaps> This command defines the relative limit for the ACLR power in the specified lower gap channel.
Page 876 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements <gap> 1 | 2 Gap (CACLR) channel number Parameters: <State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1 OFF | 0 Switches the function off ON | 1 Switches the function on *RST: Parameters for setting and query: <SBGaps>...
Page 877 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer[:CACLr][: RELative]:STATe <SBGaps>, <State> CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:LOWer[:CACLr][: RELative]:STATe? <SBGaps> This command turns the relative limit check for the specified lower gap (CACLR) chan- nel on and off. You have to activate the general ACLR limit check before using this command with CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower[:STATe].
Page 878 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <Limit> Defines the absolute limit of the specified gap channel. Default unit: dBm Parameters for setting and query: <SBGaps> AB | BC | CD | DE | EF | FG | GH Name of the gap, defined by the letters of the surrounding sub blocks (e.g.
Page 879 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer:ACLR[:RELative] <SBGaps>, <Limit> CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer:ACLR[:RELative]? <SBGaps> This command defines the relative limit for the ACLR power in the specified upper gap channel. The reference value for the relative limit is the measured channel power. If you define both an absolute limit and a relative limit, the R&S FSW uses the lower value for the limit check.
Page 880 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements ON | 1 Switches the function on *RST: Parameters for setting and query: <SBGaps> AB | BC | CD | DE | EF | FG | GH Name of the gap, defined by the letters of the surrounding sub blocks (e.g.
Page 881 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Suffix: <n> 1..n <li> 1..n <gap> 1 | 2 Gap (CACLR) channel number Parameters: <State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1 OFF | 0 Switches the function off ON | 1 Switches the function on *RST: Parameters for setting and query:...
Page 882 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer <SBGaps>, <Bandwidth> [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BWIDth:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer? <SBGaps> [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer <SBGaps>, <Bandwidth> [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer? <SBGaps> Defines the bandwidth of the upper gap channel in the specified gap. Suffix: <gap> 1 | 2 Gap channel number Parameters: <Bandwidth> *RST: 3.84 MHz Default unit: HZ...
Page 883 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Example: SENS:POW:ACH:FILT:GAB:MAN:LOW BC,ON Example: "Example: Configuring and Performing an Asymmetrical MSR ACLR Measurement" on page 895 Manual operation: "Weighting Filters" on page 192 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer <SBGaps>, <State> [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:GAP<gap>:MANual:UPPer? <SBGaps> This command turns the weighting filter for the specified upper gap channel on and off. Suffix: <gap>...
Page 884 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters for setting and query: <SBGaps> AB | BC | CD | DE | EF | FG | GH Name of the gap, defined by the letters of the surrounding sub blocks (e.g. "AB" for the gap between sub blocks A and B). Example: SENS:POW:ACH:FILT-ALPH:GAP:MAN:LOW BC,0.25 Example:...
Page 885 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <Count> 0 | 1 | 2 Number of gap channels in the specified gap. Parameters for setting and query: <SBGaps> AB | BC | CD | DE | EF | FG | GH Name of the gap, defined by the letters of the surrounding sub blocks (e.g.
Page 886 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements The required spacing can be determined according to the following formula: Spacing = [CF of the gap channel] - [left sub block center] + ([RF bandwidth of left sub block] /2) Suffix: <gap>...
Page 887 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements MSR Channel Names The functions for manual operation are described in Chapter 7.2.5.5, "MSR Channel Names", on page 193..............887 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:GAP<gap> ..............887 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:UACHannel ............887 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:UALTernate<ch> ........887 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SBLock<sb>:NAME[:CHANnel<ch>] [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:GAP<gap> <Name> This command queries the name of the GAP channel. Suffix: <gap>...
Page 888 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements In MSR ACLR measurements, the default TX channel names correspond to the speci- fied technology, followed by a consecutive number. The assigned sub block (A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H) is indicated as a prefix (e.g. A: WCDMA1). This command is for MSR signals only (see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>: on page 842).
Page 889 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ACPower:GAP<gap>:ACLR:RESult? The command returns the ACLR power limit check results for the selected gap channel in an MSR ACLR measurement. To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza- tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result.
Page 890 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Suffix: <n> irrelevant <li> irrelevant <gap> 1 | 2 Gap (CACLR) channel number Return values: <LowerGap_AB>, Limit check results for the CACLR power in the upper and lower <UpperGap_AB> gap channels for the selected gap. Results are only returned for [,<LowerGap_BC>, the available sub blocks.
Page 891 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Manual operation: "Channel power level and density (Power Unit)" on page 172 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:MODE <Mode> This command selects the way the R&S FSW displays the power of adjacent channels. You need at least one adjacent channel for the command to work. Parameters: <Mode>...
Page 892 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements //Name the first transmission channel 'TX Channel'. POW:ACH:NAME:CHAN1 'TX Channel' //Create two adjacent channels - one adjacent channel and one alternate channel. POW:ACH:ACP 2 //Name the adjacent channel 'ABC' POW:ACH:NAME:ACH 'ABC' //Name the first alternate channel 'XYZ'. POW:ACH:NAME:ALT1 'XYZ' //Define a bandwidth of 30 kHz for the transmission channel.
Page 893 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements //---------------Working with Limits------------ //Define a relative limit of 30 dB below the power of the reference channel //for both adjacent channels. CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH 30DB,30DB //Define a relative limit of 25 dB below the power of the reference channel //for the first alternate channels.
Page 894 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements //Configure general measurement settings :SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer 1.25GHz :SENSe:FREQuency:SPAN 62.0MHz :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBCount 3 //----------------- Configuring Sub block A :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:TXCHannel:COUNt 3 :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:FREQuency:CENTer 1.230GHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:RFBWidth 12MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:CENTer:CHANnel1 1.226GHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:CENTer:CHANnel2 1.230GHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:CENTer:CHANnel3 1.234GHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:TECHnology:CHANnel1 WCDMA :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:TECHnology:CHANnel2 WCDMA :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:TECHnology:CHANnel3 GSM :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:BANDwidth:CHANnel1 2.5MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:BANDwidth:CHANnel2 2.5MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock1:BANDwidth:CHANnel3 2.5MHZ...
Page 895 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:ACHannel 1.60MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:ALTernate1 1.60MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ACHannel 3MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ALTernate1 5MHZ //----------------- Configuring gap (CACLR) channels :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:GAP1 2.0MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:GAP2 5.0MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:GAP1 2.0MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:GAP2 2.0MHZ //--------------Performing the Measurement----- //Select single sweep mode. INIT:CONT OFF //Initiate a new measurement and wait until the sweep has finished. INIT;*WAI //---------------Retrieving Results------------- //Return the results for the ACLR measurement.
Page 896 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Figure 14-1: Asymmetrical MSR signal structure //-----------Preparing the measurement ------------ //Reset the instrument *RST // Select ACLR measurement :CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect ACPower // Select MSR Standard :CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:POWer:PRESet MSR //Configure general measurement settings :SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer 1.25GHz :SENSe:FREQuency:SPAN 62.0MHz :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBCount 3 //----------------- Configuring Sub block A...
Page 897 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock2:RFBWidth 4MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock2:CENTer:CHANnel1 1.255GHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock2:TECHnology:CHANnel1 LTE_1_40 :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock2:BANDwidth:CHANnel1 3.25MHZ //----------------- Configuring Sub block C :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock3:TXCHannel:COUNt 2 :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock3:FREQuency:CENTer 1.268GHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock3:RFBWidth 8MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock3:CENTer:CHANnel1 1.266GHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock3:CENTer:CHANnel2 1.270GHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock3:BANDwidth:CHANnel1 2.75MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SBLock3:BANDwidth:CHANnel2 2.75MHZ //----------------- Configuring ADJ channels :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:ACHannel 1.60MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:ALTernate1 1.60MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ACHannel 3MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ALTernate1 5MHZ...
Page 898 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:GAP1:MAN:LOW AB,0.25 :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:GAP1:MAN:UPP AB,0.25 :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:GAP2:MAN:UPP AB,0.25 //Limit check :CALC:LIM:ACP ON :CALC:LIM:ACP:GAP1:MAN:UPP:ABS:STAT AB,ON :CALC:LIM:ACP:GAP1:MAN:UPP:ABS AB,3DBM :CALC:LIM:ACP:GAP2:MAN:UPP:ABS:STAT AB,ON :CALC:LIM:ACP:GAP2:MAN:UPP:ABS AB,3DBM //----------------- Configuring BC gap channels // 2 lower, 0 upper :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:GAP:MAN:CHAN:COUN:LOW BC,2 :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:GAP1:MAN:LOW BC,2.0MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:GAP2:MAN:LOW BC,4.2MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:GAP1:MAN:LOW BC,2.0MHZ :SENSe:POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth:GAP2:MAN:LOW BC,2.0MHZ...
Page 899: Measuring The Carrier-To-Noise Ratio
® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements //-13.2390127767,-13.2390134744, //Totals for each sub block //-8.4649064021,-17.0863336597,-10.2287131689, //Adjacent channels //-67.9740721019,-67.9740728014,-0.00434041734,-0.00434041734, //CACLR channels (AB2L, BC1U, BC2U invalid) //-0.52933512766,-64.9990115835 9.91e37,-0.33507330922, //-64.4924159646, 9.91e37,-0.52932552495, 9.91e37 //Limit check CALC:LIM:ACP:GAP1:ACLR:RES? //Result for gap 1 channels: ABGap1L,ABGap1U,BCGap1L, ( BCGap1U invalid ) //PASSED,PASSED,PASSED,NONE CALC:LIM:ACP:GAP2:ACLR:RES? //Result for gap 2 channels: (ABGap2L invalid ),ABGap2U,BCGap2L, ( BCGap2U invalid )
Page 900: Measuring The Occupied Bandwidth
® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements //Initiates a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished. // Now turn off the carrier signal and repeat the measurement: INIT;*WAI //Initiates a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished. //---------------Retrieving Results------------- CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? CN //Returns the carrier-to-noise ratio.
Page 901 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]POWer:BWIDth <Percentage> [SENSe:]POWer:BANDwidth <Percentage> This command selects the percentage of the total power that defines the occupied bandwidth. Parameters: <Percentage> Range: 10 PCT to 99.9 PCT *RST: 99 PCT Default unit: PCT Example: POW:BAND 95PCT Manual operation:...
Page 902: Remote Commands For Noise Power Ratio (Npr) Measurements
® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements 14.5.6 Remote Commands for Noise Power Ratio (NPR) Measurements ● Activating an NPR Measurement................902 ● Configuring an NPR Measurement............... 902 ● Configuring Signal Generator Control..............905 ● Retrieving Results from an NP Measurement............915 ●...
Page 903 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Example: NPR:CHAN:BWID 100000000 NPR:NOTC:COUN 2 NPR:NOTC1:BWID 5000000 A bandwidth of 100000000 - (2*5000000) = 90000000 Hz is used as a basis for the total power density. Manual operation: "Channel Bandwidth" on page 224 [SENSe:]NPRatio:CHANnel:INTegration:AUTO <State>...
Page 904 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]NPRatio:CHANnel:INTegration:FREQuency:OFFSet <Frequency> Shifts the bandwidth to be used for total power density calculation away from the cur- rently defined center frequency. Parameters: <Frequency> *RST: Default unit: HZ Example: NPR:CHAN:INT:FREQ:OFFS 10000000 Shifts the integration bandwidth by 10 MHz from the center fre- quency.
Page 905 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Suffix: <notch> 1..n irrelevant Parameters: <Amount> integer Range: 1 to 25 *RST: Example: NPR:NOTC:COUN 2 Manual operation: "Number of Notches" on page 224 [SENSe:]NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:FREQuency:OFFSet <Frequency> Defines the center position of the notch in relation to the currently defined center fre- quency.
Page 906 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements ..........911 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:CLOCk? ........911 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:COUNt:CSTate? ............ 912 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:POWer:LEVel:CSTate? ........912 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:POWer:LEVel:OFFSet:CSTate? ..........913 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:RFOutput:STATe:CSTate? ..........913 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:SETTings:NOTCh:UPDate ............913 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:SETTings:UPDate ............... 913 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:STATe:CSTate? ................914 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio[:STATe] ................914 CONFigure:GENerator:POWer:LEVel ..............914 CONFigure:GENerator:POWer:LEVel:OFFSet .................914 CONFigure:GENerator:RFOutput[:STATe] ............... 915 CONFigure:GENerator:TARGet:PATH:BB? .................915 CONFigure:GENerator:TARGet:PATH:RF...
Page 907 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Manual operation: "ARB Waveform File" on page 230 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:BB:STANdard? Queries the standard currently used by the signal generator. Return values: <Standard> Example: CONF:GEN:NPR:BB:STAN? Usage: Query only Manual operation: "Standard" on page 230 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:CONNection:CSTate? Queries the state of the connected signal generator and its availability for the Spectrum application.
Page 908 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Signal generator control off SUCCessful Setting successfully applied on the signal generator ERRor Control error, for example because a specified value cannot be applied on the signal generator Example: CONF:GEN:NPR:EXT:ROSC:CST? Usage: Query only Manual operation: "Reference Frequency"...
Page 909 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Manual operation: "Generator Frequency Coupling State" on page 232 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:FREQuency:OFFSet <FrequencyOffset> Defines a fixed offset to be applied to the generator frequency. Parameters: <FrequencyOffset> numeric value Default unit: HZ Example: CONF:GEN:NPR:FREQ:OFFS 5 Manual operation: "Frequency Offset"...
Page 910 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements ERRor Control error, for example because a specified value cannot be applied on the signal generator Example: CONF:GEN:NPR:NOTC1:STAT? Usage: Query only Manual operation: "Notch Bandwidth (Absolute / Relative to Channel BW)" on page 225 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>:FREQuency:OFFSet:CSTate? Queries the state of the frequency offset for the specified notch.
Page 911 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Manual operation: "Generator Notch State" on page 225 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:NOTCh<notch>[:STATe] <NotchState> Enables or disables the specified notch on the signal generator. Suffix: <notch> 1..n Parameters: <NotchState> ON | OFF | 0 | 1 OFF | 0 The notch is not considered for signal generation on the connec- ted signal generator.
Page 912 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements ERRor Control error, for example because a specified value cannot be applied on the signal generator Example: CONF:GEN:NPR:NOTC:COUN:CST? Usage: Query only Manual operation: "Number of Notches" on page 224 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:POWer:LEVel:CSTate? Queries the state of the generator power level. Return values: <ControlState>...
Page 913 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio:RFOutput:STATe:CSTate? Queries the state of the generator RF output. Return values: <ControlState> OFF | SUCCessful | ERRor Signal generator control off SUCCessful Setting successfully applied on the signal generator ERRor Control error, for example because a specified value cannot be applied on the signal generator Example: CONF:GEN:NPR:RFO:STAT:CST?
Page 914 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Example: CONF:GEN:NPR:STAT:CST? Usage: Query only Manual operation: "Generator Notch Filter State" on page 224 CONFigure:GENerator:NPRatio[:STATe] <State> Activates or deactivates a notch filter on the signal generator. Parameters: <State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1 OFF | 0 Switches the function off ON | 1...
Page 915 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements OFF | 0 Switches the function off ON | 1 Switches the function on *RST: Example: CONF:GEN:RFO:STAT ON Manual operation: "RF Output State" on page 229 CONFigure:GENerator:TARGet:PATH:BB? Queries the BB signal path of the generator used for signal generation. Return values: <Path>...
Page 916 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Suffix: <n> irrelevant Query parameters: <ResultType> CPOWer | NPOWer | NPRatio | ALL CPOWer Returns the total measured power divided by the channel band- width (without notches) or integration bandwidth (with notches) in dBm/Hz NPOWer Returns the power measured in each notch divided by the notch...
Page 917: Measuring The Spectrum Emission Mask
® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements NPR:NOTC1:BWID 3.600000 NPR:NOTC2:FREQ:OFFS 12200000 NPR:NOTC2:BWID:REL 5 //--------------Performing the Measurement----- //Select single sweep mode. INIT:CONT OFF //Initiate a new measurement and wait until the sweep has finished. INIT;*WAI //---------------Retrieving Results------------- //Query the noise power ratio for each notch. CALC:NPR:RES? ALL //Result: //9.38,-51.73,-4685,-61.10,-56.26...
Page 918 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements 14.5.7.1 Managing Measurement Configurations The following commands control measurement configurations for SEM measurements.............918 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:RESTore ..............918 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:PRESet[:STANdard] ..............918 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:PRESet:RESTore ............... 919 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:PRESet:STORe CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:RESTore This command restores the predefined limit lines for the selected Spectrum Emission Mask standard.
Page 919 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Suffix: <sb> 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement Manual operation: "Restore Standard Files" on page 265 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:PRESet:STORe <Standard> This command saves the current SEM measurement configuration. Standard definitions are stored in an xml file. The default directory for SEM standards is C:\R_S\INSTR\sem_std.
Page 920 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements LIST Turns on spurious emission measurements. *RST: AUTO Example: SWE:MODE ESP 14.5.7.3 Configuring a Multi-SEM Measurement In the Spectrum application only, spectrum emissions can be measured for multiple sub blocks of channels (see Chapter 7.6.4.5, "SEM with Multiple Sub Blocks ("Multi- SEM")", on page 246).
Page 921 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <Subblocks> Number of sub blocks in the SEM measurement. Range: 1 to 8 *RST: Example: ESP:SCO 2 Manual operation: "Sub Block Count" on page 257 14.5.7.4 Configuring a Sweep List The following commands define a sweep list for SEM measurements. The sweep list cannot be configured using remote commands during an on-going sweep operation.
Page 922 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:HSPeed <State> This command turns high speed mode for SEM measurements on and off. For more information including restrictions see Chapter 7.6.4.3, "Fast SEM Measure- ments", on page 244. Suffix: <sb> 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement Parameters: <State>...
Page 923 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements <ri> 1..n Selects the measurement range. Parameters: <VBW> Video bandwidth. Refer to the data sheet for available video bandwidths. *RST: 10.0 MHz Default unit: Hz Manual operation: "VBW" on page 253 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:COUNt? This command queries the number of ranges in the sweep list.
Page 924 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements <ri> 1...30 Selects the measurement range. Parameters: <FilterType> NORMal Gaussian filters CFILter channel filters RRC filters CISPr | PULSe CISPR (6 dB) - requires EMI (R&S FSW-K54) option Return value for query is always PULS. MIL Std (6 dB) - requires EMI (R&S FSW-K54) option 5 Pole filters *RST:...
Page 925 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>[:FREQuency]:STOP <Frequency> This command defines the stop frequency of a spurious emission measurement range. Make sure to set an appropriate span. If you set a span that is ● smaller than the span the sweep list covers, the R&S FSW will not measure the ranges that are outside the span - results may be invalid.
Page 926 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements In case of high speed measurements, the input attenuation has to be identical for all ranges. Suffix: <sb> 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement <ri> 1..n Selects the measurement range. Parameters: <State>...
Page 927 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0 *RST: Manual operation: "Preamp" on page 254 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:INSert <Mode> This command inserts a new SEM range and updates the range numbers accordingly. Suffix: <sb>...
Page 928 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:ABSolute:STOP <Level> This command defines an absolute limit for a SEM range. Unlike manual operation, you can define an absolute limit anytime and regardless of the limit check mode. Suffix: <sb> 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement <ri>...
Page 929 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:RELative:STARt:ABS <Level> This command defines an absolute limit for the MAX function of the relative limit for a SEM range. For more information see "Relative limit line functions" on page 243. Suffix: <sb>...
Page 930 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements The maximum of the relative and the absolute level is used as the limit start value. Use the [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>: RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:RELative:STARt [SENSe: ]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:RELative: commands to define these values. STARt:ABS No function is used, the relative limit line is defined by a fixed relative start value.
Page 931 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements For more information see "Relative limit line functions" on page 243. Suffix: <sb> 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement <ri> 1..n Selects the SEM range. <li> 1..n Power class for which the limit is defined. Parameters: <Level>...
Page 932 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements No function is used, the relative limit line is defined by a fixed relative stop value. Use the [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>: command to define RANGe<ri>:LIMit<li>:RELative:STOP this value. *RST: Example: SENSe:ESPectrum:RANGe:LIMit:RELative:STOP: FUNCtion MAX For a detailed example see Chapter 14.5.7.11, "Example: SEM Measurement", on page 950.
Page 933 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements <ri> Selects the measurement range. Parameters: <SweepPoint> Minimum number of sweep points per range Range: 1 to 32001 *RST: Example: SENSe1:ESPectrum:RANGe3:POINts:MIN:VALue 400 Manual operation: "Min Sweep Points" on page 255 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:MLCalc <Function> Defines the function used to calculate the limit line for the n-th power class for overlap- ping ranges in Multi-SEM measurements.
Page 934 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <RefLevel> Reference level. Refer to the data sheet for the reference level range. *RST: 0 dBm Default unit: dBm Manual operation: "Ref Level" on page 253 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:SWEep:TIME <SweepTime> This command defines the sweep time for a SEM range. In case of high speed measurements, the sweep time has to be identical for all ranges.
Page 935 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RANGe<ri>:TRANsducer <Transducer> This command selects a transducer factor for a SEM range. Note that ● the transducer must cover at least the span of the range ● the x-axis has to be linear ●...
Page 936 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:BWID <Bandwidth> This command defines the channel bandwidth of the reference range. The bandwidth is available if the power reference is the channel power. Suffix: <sb> 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement Parameters: <Bandwidth>...
Page 937 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Return values: <RefRange> Number of the current reference range. Range: 1 to 30 Usage: Query only [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:RTYPe <Type> This command defines the type of the power reference. Suffix: <sb> 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement Parameters: <Type>...
Page 938 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Setting parameters: <Max1> Defines the value range for power class 1 as -200 to <Max1>. Only available for CALC:LIM:ESP:PCL:COUNT >=2 If only 2 power classes are defined, the value range for power class 2 is defined as <Max1>...
Page 939 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements <sb> 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement Parameters: <Mode> AUTO The power class (and thus the limit line) is assigned dynamically according to the currently measured channel power. MANUAL One of the specified power classes is selected manually for the entire measurement.
Page 940 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements This command must be executed before any new power class values can be defined using CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:PCLass<pc>:MAXimum CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:PCLass<pc>:MINimum. Suffix: <n> irrelevant <li> irrelevant <sb> 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement <pc>...
Page 941 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Suffix: <n> irrelevant <li> irrelevant <sb> 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement <pc> 1..n power class Parameters: <State> ABSolute | RELative | AND | OR ABSolute Evaluates only limit lines with absolute power values RELative Evaluates only limit lines with relative power values Evaluates limit lines with relative and absolute power values.
Page 942 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Example: CALC:LIM:ESP:PCL1:MAX -40 dBm Sets the maximum power value of the first power class to -40 dBm. Manual operation: "PMin/ PMax" on page 260 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<li>:ESPectrum<sb>:PCLass<pc>:MINimum <Level> This command defines the lower limit of a particular power class. Note: ●...
Page 943 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:APPLy This command configures the SEM sweep list according to the MSR settings defined by previous commands. Suffix: <sb> 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement Example: //Select the band category 1 ESP2:MSR:BCAT 1 //Set the base station class to medium range ESP2:MSR:CLAS MED...
Page 944 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Manual operation: "Bands" on page 262 [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:BCATegory <Category> This command defines the band category for MSR measurements, i.e. the combination of available carriers to measure. Suffix: <sb> 1 to 8 Sub block in a Multi-SEM measurement Parameters: <Category>...
Page 945 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements LOCal Local Area *RST: WIDE Example: //Select the band category 1 ESP2:MSR:BCAT 1 //Set the base station class to medium range ESP2:MSR:CLAS MED //Set the maximum output power to 10 dBm. ESP2:MSR:MPOW 10 //Set the frequency range of the base station to >...
Page 946 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>:MSR:GSM:CPResent <State> This command defines whether a GSM/Edge carrier is located at the edge of the speci- fied RF bandwidth. In this case, the specification demands specific limits for the SEM ranges. This command is only available for band category 2 (see [SENSe:]ESPectrum<sb>: on page 944).
Page 947 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Example: //Select the band category 2 ESP2:MSR:BCAT BC2 //Set the base station class to medium range ESP2:MSR:CLAS MED //Set the maximum output power to 10 dBm. ESP2:MSR:MPOW 10 //Set the base station RF bandwidth to 20 MHz ESP2:MSR:RFBW 20MHZ //LTE present ESP2:MSR:LTE:CPR ON...
Page 948 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <Bandwidth> Bandwidth in Hz *RST: 10.0 MHz Default unit: Hz Example: //Select the band category 1 ESP2:MSR:BCAT 1 //Set the base station class to medium range ESP2:MSR:CLAS MED //Set the maximum output power to 10 dBm. ESP2:MSR:MPOW 10 //Set the frequency range of the base station to >...
Page 949 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Example: CALC:ESP:PSE:AUTO OFF Deactivates the list evaluation. Manual operation: "List Evaluation State (Result Summary)" on page 266 CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PSEarch[:IMMediate] CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PEAKsearch[:IMMediate] This command initiates a list evaluation. Suffix: <n> Window CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PSEarch:MARGin <Threshold> CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PEAKsearch:MARGin <Margin> This command defines the threshold of the list evaluation.
Page 950 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements 14.5.7.9 Performing an SEM Measurement The following commands are required to perform an SEM measurement: ● SENS:SWE:MODE ESP, see on page 919 [SENSe:]SWEep:MODE ● on page 836 INITiate<n>[:IMMediate] 14.5.7.10 Retrieving Results The following commands analyze and retrieve measurement results for SEM measure- ments.
Page 951 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements ESP:RTYP CPOW //Define a channel bandwidth of 4 MHz for the power reference. ESP:BWID 4 MHZ //Use an RRC filter with a roll-off factor of 0.5 when measuring //the reference power. ESP:FILT:RRC ON ESP:FILT:ALPH 0.5 //------------ Configuring Power Classes-------------------- //Define 3 power classes.
Page 952 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements //Define a video bandwidth of 5 MHz for range 2. ESP:RANG2:BAND:VID 5000000 //Define a sweep time of 1 second for range 2. ESP:RANG2:SWE:TIME 1 //Define a reference level of 0 dBm for range 2. ESP:RANG2:RLEV 0 //Define an input attenuation of 10 dB for range 2.
Page 953: Measuring Spurious Emissions
® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements //------------ Configuring List Evaluation----------------- //Activate list evaluation, i.e. the peak is determined for each range //after each sweep. CALC:ESP:PSE:AUTO ON //Define a peak threshold of 10 dB. CALC:ESP:PSE:MARG 10dB //------------ Managing Measurement Configurations---------- //Save the current configuration in a new file named '3GPP_UL_User' //in the same directory so the standard is not overwritten.
Page 954 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements 14.5.8.2 Configuring a Sweep List The following commands configure the sweep list for spurious emission measure- ments. The sweep list cannot be configured using remote commands during an on-going sweep operation. Useful commands for configuring the sweep described elsewhere: ●...
Page 955 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Manual operation: "RBW" on page 286 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:BANDwidth:VIDeo <VBW> This command defines the video bandwidth for a spurious emission measurement range. Suffix: <ri> 1..n Selects the measurement range. Parameters: <VBW> Video bandwidth. Refer to the data sheet for available video bandwidths. Default unit: Hz Example: LIST:RANG2:BAND:VID 3KHZ...
Page 956 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:DELete This command removes a range from the sweep list. Note that ● you cannot delete the reference range ● a minimum of three ranges is mandatory. Suffix: <ri> 1..n Selects the measurement range. Example: LIST:RANG2:DEL [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:DETector <Detector>...
Page 957 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Suffix: <ri> 1..30 Selects the measurement range. Parameters: <FilterType> NORMal Gaussian filters CFILter channel filters RRC filters CISPr | PULSe CISPR (6 dB) - requires EMI (R&S FSW-K54) option Return value for query is always PULS. MIL Std (6 dB) - requires EMI (R&S FSW-K54) option 5 Pole filters *RST:...
Page 958 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Suffix: <ri> 1..n Selects the measurement range. Parameters: <State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1 *RST: Example: LIST:RANG2:INP:ATT:AUTO ON Manual operation: "RF Attenuation Mode" on page 287 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:INPut:GAIN:STATe <State> This command turns the preamplifier for a spurious emission measurement range on and off.
Page 959 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:LIMit:STARt <Level> This command defines an absolute limit for a spurious emission measurement range. Suffix: <ri> 1..n Selects the measurement range. Parameters: <Level> Absolute limit at the start frequency of a SEM range. Range: -400 to 400 *RST:...
Page 960 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:POINts[:VALue] <Points> This command defines the number of sweep points in a spurious emission measure- ment range. Suffix: <ri> 1..n Selects the measurement range. Parameters: <Points> For more information on sweep points see Chapter 8.5.1.8, "How Much Data is Measured: Sweep Points and Sweep Count",...
Page 961 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<ri>:SWEep:TIME:AUTO <State> This command turns automatic selection of the sweep time for a spurious emission measurement range on and off. Suffix: <ri> 1..n Selects the measurement range. Parameters: <State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1 *RST: Example: LIST:RANG2:SWE:TIME:AUTO ON...
Page 962 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements ................962 CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:MARGin ..................963 CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:PSHow ................963 CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:PSHow ................963 CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:SUBRanges ................. 963 CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:SUBRanges CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:AUTO <State> CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:AUTO <State> This command turns the list evaluatio n on and off. Suffix: <n> Window Parameters: <State> ON | OFF | 0 | 1 *RST: Example: CALC:PSE:AUTO OFF...
Page 963 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <Margin> Range: -200 to 200 Default unit: dB Example: CALC:PSE:MARG 100 Sets the threshold to 100 dB. Manual operation: "Margin" on page 289 CALCulate<n>:PSEarch:PSHow <State> CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch:PSHow <State> This command turns the peak labels in the diagram on and off. Peak labels are blue squares.
Page 964 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Usage: Event 14.5.8.5 Performing a Spurious Measurement The following commands are required to perform a Spurious measurement: SENS:SWE:MODE LIST, see on page 919 [SENSe:]SWEep:MODE on page 836, see Chapter 14.5.1, "Performing Mea- INITiate<n>[:IMMediate] surements", on page 834...
Page 965 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Note that this example is primarily meant to demonstrate the remote control com- mands, it does not necessarily reflect a useful measurement task. //------------Preparing the measurement------------- *RST //Resets the instrument SWE:MODE LIST //Activates spurious emissions measurement INIT:CONT OFF //Selects single sweep mode.
Page 966 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements //Deletes the fourth range. LIST:RANG1:STAR 10000000 //Defines a start frequency of 10 MHz for range 1. LIST:RANG1:STOP 100000000 //Defines a stop frequency of 100 MHz for range 1. LIST:RANG1:BAND 500000 //Defines a resolution bandwidth of 500 kHz in range 1. LIST:RANG1:BAND:VID 5000000 //Defines a video bandwidth of 5 MHz for range 1.
Page 967: Analyzing Statistics (Apd, Ccdf)
® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements CALC:PSE:SUBR 10 //Sets 10 peaks per range to be stored in the list. //--------------Performing the Measurement----- INIT:SPUR; *WAI //Performs a spurious emission measurement and waits until the sweep has finished. //---------------Retrieving Results------------- CALC:LIM1:FAIL? //Queries the result of the check for limit line 1.
Page 968 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Suffix: <n> irrelevant Parameters: <State> ON | OFF | 1 | 0 *RST: Example: CALC:STAT:CCDF ON Switches on the CCDF measurement. 14.5.9.2 Configuring Statistical Measurements The following commands configure the measurement. Useful commands for configuring statistical measurements described elsewhere: ●...
Page 969 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <Samples> Range: Min: 100, Max: depends on the RBW filter *RST: 100000 Example: CALC:STAT:NSAM 500 Sets the number of measurement points to be acquired to 500. Manual operation: "Number of Samples" on page 298 14.5.9.3 Using Gate Ranges for Statistical Measurements...
Page 970 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<t>:STARt<gr> <Time> This command defines the start time for a gate range. Suffix: <t> Trace <gr> 1..n gate range Parameters: <Time> The value range depends on the gate period you have set for the selected trace with [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<t>: PERiod.
Page 971 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Suffix: <t> Trace <gr> 1..n gate range Parameters: <Time> The value range depends on the gate period you have set for the selected trace with [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<t>: PERiod. The following rules apply: • the stop time may not be higher than the length of the gate •...
Page 972 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Example: CALC:STAT:PRES Resets the scaling for statistical functions Manual operation: "Default Settings" on page 302 CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:AUTO ONCE This command initiates an automatic scaling of the diagram (x- and y-axis). To obtain maximum resolution, the level range is set as a function of the measured spacing between peak power and the minimum power for the APD measurement and of the spacing between peak power and mean power for the CCDF measurement.
Page 973 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <RefLevel> The unit is variable. If a reference level offset is included, the range is adjusted by that offset. Range: -130 dBm to 30 dBm *RST: 0 dBm Default unit: dBm Example: CALC:STAT:SCAL:X:RLEV -60dBm Manual operation:...
Page 974 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Parameters: <Magnitude> The number is a statistical value and therefore dimensionless. Range: 1E-5 to 1.0 *RST: Example: CALC:STAT:SCAL:Y:UPP 0.01 Manual operation: "Y-Max/ Y-Min" on page 302 14.5.9.5 Performing a Statistical Measurement The following commands are required to perform a statistical measurement: on page 836, see Chapter 14.5.1, "Performing Mea- INITiate<n>[:IMMediate]...
Page 975 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Usage: Query only CALCulate<n>:STATistics:RESult<res>? <ResultType> This command queries the results of a CCDF or ADP measurement for a specific trace. Suffix: <n> irrelevant <res> Trace Query parameters: <ResultType> MEAN Average (=RMS) power in dBm measured during the measure- ment time.
Page 976 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements //-----------Configuring the measurement ------------ *RST //Reset the instrument TRIG:SOUR EXT //Defines the use of an external trigger. TRIG:HOLD 25us //Defines a trigger offset of 25 μs. CALC:STAT:APD ON //Activates APD measurement. CALC:STAT:NSAM 1000 //Sets the number of samples to be included in the statistical evaluation to 1000.
Page 977: Measuring The Time Domain Power
® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements //---------------Retrieving Results------------- CALC:STAT:RES1? MEAN //Returns the mean average power for the useful part of the GSM signal. //------------- Determining the CCDF values------------------- CALC:STAT:CCDF ON //Activates CCDF measurement. CALC:MARK2:Y:PERC 95PCT //Sets marker 2 to the 95% probability value. INIT;*WAI //Initiates a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished.
Page 978 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Remote commands exclusive to time domain power measurements ........... 978 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AOFF ..........978 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AVERage ..........979 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd ..........979 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary[:STATe] ........979 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN[:STATe] ........980 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak[:STATe] ......... 980 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS[:STATe] ........980 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation[:STATe] CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AOFF This command turns all time domain power evaluation modes off. Suffix: <n>...
Page 979 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd <State> This command switches on or off the peak-hold function for the active power measure- ment in zero span in the window specified by the suffix <n>. If activated, the peak for each sweep is compared to the previously stored peak;...
Page 980 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak[:STATe] <State> This command turns the evaluation to determine the positive peak time domain power on and off. The R&S FSW performs the measurement on the trace marker 1 is positioned on. Suffix: <n>...
Page 981 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements on page 836 INITiate<n>[:IMMediate] Chapter 14.5.1, "Performing Measurements", on page 834 14.5.10.3 Retrieving Measurement Results The following commands query the results for time domain measurements. Measuring the Mean Power ....... 981 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:AVERage:RESult? ......
Page 982 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Usage: Query only CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN:RESult? This command queries the mean time domain power. To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza- tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible for single sweep mode.
Page 983 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements See also on page 835. INITiate<n>:CONTinuous Suffix: <n> Window <m> Marker Return values: <PeakPower> Peak power of the signal during the measurement time. Usage: Query only CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PPEak:RESult? This command queries the positive peak time domain power. To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza- tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result.
Page 984 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:PHOLd:RESult? This command queries the maximum RMS of the time domain power. The query is only possible if the peak hold function has been activated previously using CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd. To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza- tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result.
Page 985 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Suffix: <n> Window <m> Marker Return values: <StandardDeviation> Standard deviation of the signal during the measurement time. Usage: Query only CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation:PHOLd:RESult? This command queries the maximum standard deviation of the time domain power. The query is only possible if the peak hold function has been activated previously using CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:PHOLd.
Page 986 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements //-------------Configuring the Measurement----------------------- *RST //Resets the instrument INIT:CONT OFF //Turns on single sweep mode. FREQ:CENT 1.8GHz //Sets the center frequency to 1.8 GHz. BAND:RES 100kHz //Sets the bandwidth to 100 kHz. SWE:TIME 10ms //Sets the sweep time to 640 µs.
Page 987: Measuring The Harmonic Distortion
® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements 14.5.11 Measuring the Harmonic Distortion All remote control commands specific to harmonic distortion measurements are descri- bed here. ● Activating the Measurement..................987 ● Configuring the Measurement................987 ● Performing the Measurement................989 ● Retrieving Results....................
Page 988 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Remote commands exclusive to harmonic distortion measurements ....... 988 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:BANDwidth:AUTO ........988 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:NHARmonics ..........988 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:PRESet CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:BANDwidth:AUTO <State> This command selects the resolution bandwidth of the harmonic in respect to the band- width of the first harmonic. Suffix: <n>...
Page 989 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Suffix: <n> Window <m> Marker Manual operation: "Adjust Settings" on page 317 14.5.11.3 Performing the Measurement The following commands are required to perform a harmonic distortion measurement: on page 836, see Chapter 14.5.1, "Performing Mea- INITiate<n>[:IMMediate] surements", on page 834...
Page 990: Measuring The Third Order Intercept Point
® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Suffix: <n> Window <m> Marker Return values: <Harmonics> Returns one value for every harmonic. The first value is the absolute power of the first harmonic. The unit is variable. The other values are power levels relative to the first harmonic. The unit for these is dB.
Page 991 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements 14.5.12.1 Determining the TOI All remote control commands specific to TOI measurements are described here. Useful commands for TOI measurements described elsewhere ● on page 1154 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X ● on page 1169 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X:RELative? ●...
Page 992 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:TOI:RESult? This command queries the results for the third order intercept point measurement. To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza- tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible for single sweep mode.
Page 993: Measuring The Am Modulation Depth
® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements 14.5.13 Measuring the AM Modulation Depth All remote control commands specific to AM modulation depth measurements are described here. ● Configuring and Performing the Measurement............. 993 ● Example: Measuring the AM Modulation Depth............994 14.5.13.1 Configuring and Performing the Measurement...
Page 994 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:MDEP:SEAR ONCE Executes the search of an AM modulated signal at the currently available trace. Manual operation: "Search Signals" on page 330 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth:RESult<t>? This command queries the results of the AM modulation depth measurement.. To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza- tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result.
Page 995: Remote Commands For Emi Measurements
® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements //Queries the measurement results. //If the results are not accurate, change the position of the //the temporary markers manually. //----Changing the position of the temp markers----- CALC:MARK:X 100MHZ //Positions the reference marker on 100 MHz. CALC:DELT2:X 5KHZ //Positions delta marker 2 and 3 at a distance of 5 kHz to the reference marker.
Page 996 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements 14.5.14.2 Configuring EMI Markers The commands required to configure EMI markers are described here. Useful commands for configuring EMI markers described elsewhere: ● on page 1155 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe] on page 1153 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe] ● on page 1155 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe] on page 1153...
Page 997 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements 14.5.14.3 Configuring the EMI Final Test The commands required to configure the EMI final test are described here. Useful commands for configuring EMI final tests described elsewhere: ● on page 1032 [SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution]:TYPE ●...
Page 998 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements 14.5.14.4 Configuring EMI Limit Lines The commands required to define limit lines for EMI measurements are described in Chapter 14.8.4, "Configuring Display and Limit Lines", on page 1209. 14.5.14.5 Controlling LISN The commands required to control a LISN are described here................998 INPut<ip>:LISN:FILTer:HPASs[:STATe] ....................
Page 999 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements Suffix: <ip> 1 | 2 For R&S FSW85 models with two RF input connectors: 1: Input 1 (1 mm [RF Input] connector) 2: Input 2 (1.85 mm [RF2 Input] connector) For all other models: irrelevant Parameters: <Phase>...
Page 1000 ® Remote Commands R&S Configuring and Performing Measurements FOURphase R&S ESH2-Z5: four phases (incl. protective earth) are controlla- ble. Turns off remote control of the LISN. TWOPhase R&S ESH3-Z5: two phases (incl. protective earth) are controlla- ble. *RST: Example: //Select LISN INP:LISN:TYPE TWOP Manual operation: "LISN Type"...

This manual is also suitable for:

Fsw8 Fsw50 Fsw67 Fsw13 Fsw85 Fsw26 ... Show all

R&S FSW Series User Manual

Table of Contents

1 Preface

2 Safety Information

3 Documentation Overview

4 Welcome to the R&S FSW

5 Getting Started

5.4.1 Understanding the Display Information

Spectrum

7.1 Basic Measurements

7.6.4 Sem Basics

Table of Contents

Selected Marker/Marker State

Input

Table of Contents

9 Common Analysis and Display Functions

10 Optimizing Measurements

11 Data Management

12 General Instrument Setup

13 Network and Remote Operation

14 Remote Commands

15 Maintenance

16 Troubleshooting

Quick Links

Chapters

Troubleshooting

Related Manuals for R&S FSW Series

Summary of Contents for R&S FSW Series